Manual Sepam Series80 Functions en
Manual Sepam Series80 Functions en
Manual Sepam Series80 Functions en
Sepam series 80
Protection, metering
and control functions
User’s manual
02/2016
Safety instructions 0
Safety alert
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury
hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.
Safety messages
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in equipment damages.
Important notes
Restricted liability
Electrical equipment should be serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out
of the use of this manual. This document is not intended as an instruction manual for
untrained persons.
Device operation
The user is responsible for checking that the rated characteristics of the device are
suitable for its application. The user is responsible for reading and following the
device’s operating and installation instructions before attempting to commission or
maintain it. Failure to follow these instructions can affect device operation and
constitute a hazard for people and property.
Protective grounding
The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national
electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.
SEPED303001EN
Sepam series 80 General contents
Introduction 1
Metering functions 2
Protection functions 3
SEPED303001EN 1
Sepam series 80 General contents
Introduction 7
Selection guide by application 8
Protection functions suitable for low voltage 10
Presentation 12
Modular architecture 13
Selection table 14
Technical characteristics 17
Environmental characteristics 18
Metering functions 20
Sensor inputs 22
General settings 23
Characteristics 24
Processing of measured signals 26
Phase current
Residual current 29
Demand current and peak demand currents 30
Phase-to-phase voltage 31
Phase-to-neutral voltage 32
Residual voltage
Neutral point voltage 33
Positive sequence voltage 34
Negative sequence voltage 35
Frequency 36
Active, reactive and apparent power 37
Peak demand active and reactive power
Power factor (cos ϕ) 39
Active and reactive energy 40
Temperature 41
Rotation speed 42
Phasor diagram 43
Network diagnosis functions 44
Tripping context
Tripping current 44
Number of phase fault trips
Number of earth fault trips 45
Negative sequence / unbalance 46
Current total harmonic distortion
Voltage total harmonic distortion 47
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ∋0, ϕ0S
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 48
Disturbance recording 49
Data log (DLG) 50
Synchro-check:
voltage comparison and out-of-sync context 55
2 SEPED303001EN
Sepam series 80 General contents
SEPED303001EN 3
Sepam series 80 General contents
4 SEPED303001EN
Sepam series 80 General contents
SEPED303001EN 5
6 SEPED303001EN
Introduction Contents
SEPED303001EN 7
Sepam range Selection guide by application
The selection guide by application suggests Sepam type(s) suitable for your protection requirements, based on your application
characteristics. The most typical applications are presented along with the associated Sepam type.
Protections
Current b b b b b b b
Voltage b b b b b b
Frequency b b b b b b
Specific Breaker Disconnec- Directional Directional Directional
failure tion earth fault earth fault and earth fault
(ROCOF) phase
Applications
Characteristics
Logic inputs/ Inputs 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
outputs Outputs 4 to 8 4 to 8 4 to 8
Temperature sensors 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 16
Channel Current 3I + I0 – 3I + I0
Voltage – 3V + V0 3V
LPCT (1) Yes – Yes
Communication ports 1 to 2 1 to 2 1 to 2
Control Matrix (2) Yes Yes Yes
Logic equation editor – – Yes
Logipam (3) – – –
Other Memory cartridge with – – –
settings
Backup battery – – –
(1) LPCT: Low-Power Current Transducer conforming to standard (4) S5X applications are identical to S4X applications with the following additional functions:
IEC 60044-8. b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up
(2) Control matrix used for simple assignment of data from the protection, b broken conductor detection
control and monitoring functions. b fault locator
(3) Logipam: Ladder language PC programming environment for extended (5) T5X applications are identical to T4X applications with the following additional functions:
use of Sepam series 80 functions. b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up
b broken conductor detection
8 SEPED303001EN
Sepam range Selection guide by application
Series 60 Series 80
11
b b b b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b b b
Direc- Directional Directional Directional Disconnect Transformer Machine Busbar voltage and Capacitor bank
tional earth fault earth fault earth fault ion or machine- differential frequency protection unbalance
earth and phase and phase (ROCOF) transformer
fault unit
differential
0 to 28 0 to 42 0 to 42 0 to 42 0 to 42
4 to 16 5 to 23 5 to 23 5 to 23 5 to 23
0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16
3I + I0 3I + 2 x I0 2 x 3I + 2 x I0 3I + I0 2 x 3I + 2 x I0
3V, 2U + V0 or Vnt 3V + V0 3V + V0 2 x 3V + 2 x V0 3V + V0
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 to 2 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
– Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SEPED303001EN 9
Sepam range Protection functions suitable for
low voltage
10 SEPED303001EN
Sepam range Protection functions suitable for
low voltage
The table below lists the Sepam protection functions suitable for low voltage
according to the earthing system used. Sepam protection functions not listed in this
table are not suitable for low voltage. The protection functions listed in this table are
available according to the Sepam type.
SEPED303001EN 11
Introduction Presentation
The Sepam range of protection relays is Sepam series 80, intelligent solutions for
designed for the operation of machines and
custom applications
1 electrical distribution networks of industrial
installations and utility substations at all Specially designed for demanding customers on large industrial sites,
Sepam series 80 provides proven solutions for electrical distribution and machine
levels of voltage. protection.
It includes 4 families
b Sepam series 20
b Sepam series 40 Main characteristics
b Sepam series 60 b protection of closed ring networks or networks with parallel incomers by directional
b Sepam series 80 protection and logic discrimination
to cover all needs, from the simplest to the b directional earth fault protection for impedance-earthed and isolated or
most complete. compensated neutral systems
b complete protection of transformers and machine-transformer units
v stable, sensitive differential protection with neural network restraint
v linked to all necessary backup protection functions
b complete protection of motors and generators
v against internal faults:
PE80324
- stable, sensitive machine differential protection, with starting and sensor loss
restraint
- field loss, stator earth fault, etc.
v against network and process faults: pole slip, speed control, inadvertent
energization, etc.
b synchro-check between 2 networks before coupling
b measurement of harmonic distortion, current and voltage, to assess network
power quality
b 42 inputs / 23 outputs for comprehensive equipment control
b mimic-based UMI for local switchgear control
b SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software, a simple and complete tool
that is indispensable for all Sepam users:
v assisted preparation of parameter and protection settings
v complete information during commissioning
v remote equipment management and diagnostics during operation
b logic equation editor built into the SFT2841 software to adapt the predefined
Sepam series 80 with integrated advanced UMI. control functions
b optional SFT2885 programming software (Logipam), to program specific control
and monitoring functions
b 2 communication ports to integrate Sepam in 2 different networks or redundant
architectures
b removable memory cartridge to get equipment in operation again quickly after the
replacement of a faulty base unit
b battery backup to save historical and disturbance recording data.
Selection guide
The Sepam series 80 family includes 16 types to offer the right solution for each
application.
12 SEPED303001EN
Introduction Modular architecture
PE50286
b Integrated mimic-based UMI
b Integrated or remote advanced UMI
7 Synchro-check module
8 Software tools:
b Sepam parameter and protection setting and
adaptation of the predefined functions
b Local or remote installation operation Ease of installation
b Programming of specific functions (Logipam) b Light, compact base unit
b Retrieval and display of disturbance recording b Easy to integrate due to Sepam’s adaptation capabilities:
data v universal supply voltage for Sepam and its logic inputs: 24 to 250 V DC
v phase currents can be measured by 1 A or 5 A current transformers, or LPCT
(Low Power Current Transducer) type sensors
v residual current calculated or measured by a choice of methods to fit requirements
b The same, easy-to-install remote modules for all Sepam units:
v mounted on DIN rail
v connected to the Sepam base unit by prefabricated cords
Commissioning assistance
b Predefined functions implemented by simple parameter setting
b User-friendly, powerful SFT2841 PC setting software tool used on all Sepam units
to provide users with all the possibilities offered by Sepam
Intuitive use
b Integrated or remote advanced User Machine Interface (UMI) installed in the most
convenient place for the facility manager
b Integrated mimic-based User Machine Interface for local control of switchgear
b User-friendly User Machine Interface, with direct access to data
b Clear graphic LCD display of all data required for local operation and installation
diagnosis
b Working language can be customized to be understood by all users.
SEPED303001EN 13
Introduction Selection table
14 SEPED303001EN
Introduction Selection table
SEPED303001EN 15
Introduction Selection table
16 SEPED303001EN
Introduction Technical characteristics
Weight
Base unit with advanced UMI Base unit with mimic-based UMI
Minimum weight (base unit without MES120)
Maximum weight (base unit with 3 MES120)
2.4 kg (5.29 lb)
4.0 kg (8.82 lb)
3.0 kg (6.61 lb)
4.6 kg (10.1 lb) 1
Sensor inputs
Phase current inputs 1 A or 5 A CT
Input impedance < 0.02 Ω
Consumption < 0.02 VA (1 A CT)
< 0.5 VA (5 A CT)
Continuous thermal withstand 4 In
1 second overload 100 In (500 A)
Voltage inputs Phase Residual
Input impedance > 100 kΩ > 100 kΩ
Consumption < 0.015 VA (100 V VT) < 0.015 VA (100 V VT)
Continuous thermal withstand 240 V 240 V
1-second overload 480 V 480 V
Isolation of inputs from other Enhanced Enhanced
isolated groups
Relay outputs
Control relay outputs O1 to O4 and Ox01 (1)
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A 8A
Breaking capacity Resistive load 8A/4A 0.7 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
L/R Load < 20 ms 6A/2A 0.5 A 0.2 A - -
L/R Load < 40 ms 4A/1A 0.2 A 0.1 A - -
Resistive load - - - - 8A
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 5A
Making capacity < 15 A for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
isolated groups
Annunciation relay output O5 and Ox02 to Ox06
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A
Breaking capacity Resistive load 2A/1A 0.6 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
L/R Load < 20 ms 2A/1A 0.5 A 0.15 A - -
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 1A
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
isolated groups
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC -20 % / +10 %
Maximum consumption < 16 W
Inrush current < 10 A 10 ms
Acceptable ripple content 12%
Acceptable momentary outages 100 ms
Battery
Format 1/2 AA lithium 3.6 V
Service life 10 years Sepam energized
MMS020 standard memory cartridge: 3 years minimum, typically 6 years with the Sepam
de-energized
MMR020 extended memory cartridge: 1.5 years minimum, typically 3 years with the Sepam
de-energized
Analog output (MSA141 module)
Current 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA, 0 - 1 mA
Load impedance < 600 Ω (including wiring)
Accuracy 0.50% full scale or 0.01 mA
(1) Relay outputs complying with clause 6.7 of standard C37.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations).
SEPED303001EN 17
Introduction Environmental characteristics
EN 55022 A
Immunity tests - Radiated disturbances
Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255-22-3 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3 III 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 2 GHz
30 V/m non-modulated; 800MHz - 2GHz (1)
ANSI C37.90.2 (2004) 20 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 (1) IV 15 kV air ; 8 kV contact
IEC 60255-22-2 8 kV air; 6 kV contact
ANSI C37.90.3 8 kV air; 4 kV contact
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency (2) IEC 61000-4-8 4 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (1-3 s)
Immunity to pulsed magnetic fields (1) IEC 61000-4-9 IV 600 A/m
Immunity to magnetic fields with damped oscillating waves (1) IIEC 61000-4-10 5 100 A/m
Immunity tests - Conducted disturbances
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255-22-6 III 10 V
Electrical fast transients/burst IEC 60255-22-4 A and B 4 kV; 2.5 kHz/2 kV; 5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4 IV 4 kV; 2.5 kHz
ANSI C37.90.1 4 kV; 2.5 kHz
1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255-22-1 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM
ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV CM; 2.5 kV DM
100 kHz damped sinusoidal wave IEC 61000-4-12 III 2 kV MC
IV (1) 4 kV MC ; 2,5 kV DM
Slow damped oscillating wave (100 kHz to 1 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III
Fast damped oscillating wave (3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III
Surges IEC 61000-4-5 III 2 kV CM; 1 kV DM
GOST R 50746-2000 (1) 4 200 A
Immunity to conducted disturbances in common mode from 0 Hz to IEC 61000-4-16 III
150 kHz
Voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11 100% for 100 ms
Mechanical robustness Standard Level/Class Value
Energized
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 1 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz - 13.2 Hz; a = ±1 mm
IEC 60068-2-64 2M1
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 10 Gn/11 ms
Earthquakes IEC 60255-21-3 2 2 Gn (horizontal)
1 Gn (vertical)
De-energized
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 2 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 27 Gn/11 ms
Jolts IEC 60255-21-2 2 20 Gn/16 ms
(1) Test conducted with a mimic-based HMI in the case of GOST performance testing.
(2) When protection functions 50N/51N or 67N are used and I0 is calculated on the sum of the phase currents, Is0 must be higher than 0.1In0.
18 SEPED303001EN
Introduction Environmental characteristics
SEPED303001EN 19
Metering functions Contents
Sensor inputs 22
General settings 23
Characteristics 24
Processing of measured signals 26
Phase current
Residual current 29
2 Demand current and peak demand currents 30
Phase-to-phase voltage 31
Phase-to-neutral voltage 32
Residual voltage
Neutral point voltage 33
Positive sequence voltage 34
Negative sequence voltage 35
Frequency 36
Active, reactive and apparent power 37
Peak demand active and reactive power
Power factor (cos ϕ) 39
Active and reactive energy 40
Temperature 41
Rotation speed 42
Phasor diagram 43
Tripping context
Tripping current 44
Number of phase fault trips
Number of earth fault trips 45
Negative sequence / unbalance 46
Current total harmonic distortion
Voltage total harmonic distortion 47
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ∋0, ϕ0S
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 48
Disturbance recording 49
Data log (DLG) 50
Synchro-check:
voltage comparison and out-of-sync context 55
Thermal capacity used
Cooling time constant 56
Operating time before tripping
Waiting time after tripping 57
Running hours and operating time counter
Starting current and starting time 58
Number of starts before inhibition
Start inhibit time 59
20 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Contents
Differential current
Through current 60
Current phase displacement 61
Apparent positive sequence impedance
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances 62
Third harmonic neutral point voltage
Third harmonic residual voltage
Capacitance
63
64
2
Capacitor unbalance current 65
Motor start report (MSR) 66
Motor start trend (MST) 68
VT supervision 71
ANSI code 60FL 71
CT supervision 73
ANSI code 60 73
Trip and closing circuit supervision 74
ANSI code 74 74
Auxiliary power supply monitoring 76
Cumulative breaking current
Number of operations 77
Operating time
Charging time 78
Number of racking out operations 79
SEPED303001EN 21
Metering functions Sensor inputs
Sepam series 80 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors
required for applications:
DE50583
The table below lists the analog inputs available according to the type of
Sepam series 80.
22 SEPED303001EN -
Metering functions General settings
2
I’n Unbalance current sensor rating (capacitor application) CT 1 A / 2 A / 5 A 1 A to 30 A
Ib Base current, according to rated power of equipment(2) 0.2 to 1.3 In
I'b Base current on additional channels Applications with transformer I'b = Ib x Un1/Un2
(not adjustable) Other applications I'b = Ib
In0, I'n0 Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents See In(I'n) rated phase current
CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 2 A or 20 A rating
1 A/5 A CT 1 A to 15 kA
Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT ratio According to current monitored
1/n must be such that 50 n 1500) and use of ACE990
Unp, Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated 0 A<In≤6.25 kA: 220 V ≤ Unp ≤ 250 kV
U’np primary phase-to-neutral voltage Vnp = Unp/ 3) 6.25 kA<In≤15 kA: 220V≤ Unp ≤ 20 kV
(Idem for U’np)
Uns, Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 90 to 230 V
U’ns 2 VTs: U21, U32 90 to 120 V
1 VT: U21 90 to 120 V
1 VT: V1 90 to 230 V
Uns0, Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero Uns/3 or Uns/ 3
U’nso sequence voltage Unp/ 3
Vntp Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage 220 V to 250 kV
(generator application)
Vnts Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage 57.7 V to 133 V
(generator application)
fn Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Phase rotation direction 1-2-3 or 1-3-2
Integration period (for demand current and peak 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
demand current and power)
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy 0.1 kWh to 5 MWh
Increments reactive energy 0.1 kVARh to 5 MVARh
S Transformer rated apparent power 100 kVA to 999 MVA
Un1 Rated winding 1 voltage 220 V to 250 kV
(main channels: I)
Un2 Rated winding 2 voltage 220 V to 400 kV
(additional channels: I')
In1 Rated winding 1 current (not adjustable) In1 = P/( 3 Un1)
In2 Rated winding 2 current (not adjustable) In2 = P/( 3 Un2)
Transformer vector shift 0 to 11
Ωn Rated speed (motor, generator) 100 to 3600 rpm
R Number of pulses per rotation (for speed acquisition) 1 to 1800 (Ωn x R/60 1500)
Zero speed set point 5 to 20 % of Ωn
Number of capacitor steps 1 to 4
Connection of capacitor steps Star / Delta
Capacitor step ratio Step 1 1
Step 2 1, 2
Step 3 1, 2, 3, 4
Step 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8
(1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
(2) Even if the value is within the range, it has to be rounded according to the setting step of 1 or 10A (i.e.: Ib = 12.2A 13A).
SEPED303001EN - 23
Metering functions Characteristics
2 Phase-to-neutral voltage
Residual voltage
Main channels (V)
Additional channels (V’)
0.05 to 1.2 Vnp
0.05 to 1.2 Vnp
0.015 to 3 Vnp
±0.5 %
±1 %
±1 %
b
24 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Characteristics
SEPED303001EN 25
Metering functions Processing of measured signals
2 The charts below indicate, for the various functions, the values produced from the
signals measured, with:
b RMS = RMS value up to the 13th harmonic
b H1 = fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component
b ΣH1 = vector sum of the fundamental components of the three phases
b H3 = 3rd harmonic component
b ΣH3 = vector sum of the 3rd harmonic components of the three phases.
26 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Processing of measured signals
SEPED303001EN 27
Metering functions Processing of measured signals
The phase rotation direction needs to be set for correct calculation of the symmetrical
components (Vd, Vi, Id, Ii).
The phase rotation direction directly affects:
b the direction of energy flow measured in the Sepam relay
b the sign and calculation of the powers and directional functions.
2
Phase rotation direction 1-2-3.
DE50109
28 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Phase current
Residual current
Phase current
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents:
b I1: phase 1 current, main channels
b I2: phase 2 current, main channels
b I3: phase 3 current, main channels
b I’1: phase 1 current, additional channels
b I’2: phase 2 current, additional channels
b I’3: phase 3 current, additional channels.
It is based on RMS current measurement and takes into account harmonics up to the
13th.
2
Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current:
b 1 A or 5 A current transformers
b LPCT (Low Power Current Transducer) type current sensors.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.02 to 40 In (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2)
±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±2 % from 0.1 to 0.3 In
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) In rated current set in the general settings.
(2) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Residual current
Operation
This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
Four types of residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam
and sensors connected to it:
b 2 residual currents I0Σ and I'0Σ, calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase
currents
b 2 measured residual currents I0 and I'0.
Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current:
b CSH120 or CSH200 specific core balance CT
b conventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer
b any core balance CT with an ACE990 interface.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range I0Σ or I’0Σ 0.005 to 40 In (1)
I0 or I’0 measured by CSH core balance CT Rating In0 = 2 A 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
In0 = 20 A 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
I0 or I’0 measured by core balance CT with ACE990 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
I0 or I’0 measured by CT 0.005 to 20 In0 (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Accuracy (2) ±1 % typical at In0
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In0
±5 % from 0.1 to 0.3 In0
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) In, In0: nominal rating set in the general settings.
(2) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), excluding sensor accuracy.
SEPED303001EN 29
Metering functions Demand current
and peak demand currents
Operation
Demand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the 3 phase
currents I1, I2 and I3:
b demand current is calculated over an adjustable period of 5 to 60 minutes
b peak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current
drawn by peak loads.
Peak demand currents may be cleared. They are saved in the event of a power
failure.
Readout
2 The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Resetting to zero
b via the clear key on the Sepam display if a peak demand is displayed
b via the clear command in the SFT2841 software
b via the communication link (remote control order TC4).
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.02 to 40 In (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2)
±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±2 % from 0.1 to 0.3 In
Display format 3 significant digits
Integration period 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
(1) In rated current set in the general settings.
(2) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
30 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Phase-to-phase voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component of:
b the main phase-to-phase voltages:
DE50334
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
1-3-2 network: phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Unp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2) main channels
±1 % typical (2) additional channels
±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Unp
±2 % from 0.06 to 0.5 Unp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Un rated current set in the general settings.
(2) At Unp, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 31
Metering functions Phase-to-neutral voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz component of:
b the main phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 measured on phases 1, 2 and 3
b the additional phase-to-neutral voltages V'1, V'2 and V'3 measured on phases 1,
2 and 3.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
2 b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±0.5 % typical (2) main channels
±1 % typical (2) additional channels
±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Vnp
±2 % from 0.06 to 0.5 Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
(2) At Vnp, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
32 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Residual voltage
Neutral point voltage
Residual voltage
Operation
This function gives the following values:
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.015 to 3 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±1 % from 0.5 to 3 Vnp
±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vnp
±5 % from 0.02 to 0.05 Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
Vnt = ( V1 + V2 + V3 ) ⁄ 3
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.015 Vnp to 3 Vntp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±1 % from 0.5 to 3 Vntp
±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vntp
±5 % from 0.02 to 0.05 Vntp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vntp: neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage.
SEPED303001EN 33
Metering functions Positive sequence voltage
Operation
This function calculates the value of the main positive sequence voltage Vd:
b from the 3 main phase-to-neutral voltages:
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vd = --- × ( V1 + aV2 + a V3 )
3
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vd = --- × ( V1 + a V2 + aV3 )
3
b or from the 2 main phase-to-phase voltages:
2 1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vd = --- × ( U21 – a U32 )
3
1
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vd = --- × ( U21 – aU32 )
3
2π
j ------
3
with a = e
The additional positive sequence voltage V'd is calculated in the same way:
b from the 3 additional phase-to-neutral voltages V'1, V'2 and V'3
b or from the 2 additional phase-to-phase voltages U'21 and U'32.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±2 % at Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
34 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Negative sequence voltage
Operation
This function calculates the value of the main negative sequence voltage Vi:
b from the 3 main phase-to-neutral voltages:
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vi = --- × ( V1 + a V2 + aV3 )
3
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vi = --- × ( V1 + aV2 + a V3 )
3
b or from the 2 main phase-to-phase voltages:
1
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: Vi = --- × ( U21 – aU32 )
3
2
1 2
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: Vi = --- × ( U21 – a U32 )
3
2π
j ------
3
with a = e
The additional negative sequence voltage V'i is calculated in the same way:
b from the 3 additional phase-to-neutral voltages V'1, V'2 and V'3
b or from the 2 additional phase-to-phase voltages U'21 and U'32.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Units V or kV
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±2 % at Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
SEPED303001EN 35
Metering functions Frequency
Operation
This function gives the frequency value.
Frequency is measured via the following:
b based on U21 or V1, if only one phase-to-phase voltage is connected to the Sepam
b based on positive sequence voltage in other cases.
Frequency is not measured if:
b the voltage U21 (or V1) or positive sequence voltage Vd is less than 40 % of Un
b the frequency f is outside the measurment range.
The measurement of the frequency f' is calculated according to the same principle,
from V'd or U'21 or V'1
2 Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Main channels
Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Range 25 to 65 Hz
Resolution 0.01 Hz (1)
Accuracy (2) ±0.01 Hz
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Additional channels
Rated frequency fn 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Range 45 to 55 Hz (fn = 50 Hz)
55 to 65 Hz (fn = 60 Hz)
Resolution (1) 0.01 Hz
Accuracy (2) ±0.05 Hz
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) On SFT2841.
(2) At Unp, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
36 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Active, reactive
and apparent power
Operation
Power values are calculated from the phase currents I1, I2 and I3:
b active power = 3.U.I cos ϕ
b reactive power = 3.U.I.sin ϕ
b apparent power = 3.U.I.
According to the sensors used, power calculations may be based on the 2 or 3
wattmeter method (see table below).
The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current, but it is
not applicable if the neutral is distributed.
The 3 wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation of 3-phase and phase by
phase powers in all cases, regardless of whether or not the neutral is distributed. 2
Connection of voltage Connection of main current P, Q, S calculation method Power per phase
channels channels P1, P2, P3
Q1, Q2, Q3
S1, S2, S3
3V I1, I2, I3 3 wattmeters Available
I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
U32, U21 + V0 I1, I2, I3 3 wattmeters Available
I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
U32, U21 without V0 I1, I2, I3 or I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
U21 I1, I2, I3 or I1, I3 2 wattmeters Not available
The system voltage is considered to be balanced
V1 I1, I2, I3 or I1, I3 No calculation P1, Q1, S1 only
Power calculation
b by 3 wattmeter method:
b by 2 wattmeter method:
2 2
b S = P +Q .
SEPED303001EN 37
Metering functions Active, reactive
and apparent power
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Active power Reactive power Apparent power
2 Measurement range
Units
P, P1, P2, P3
±(0.8 % Sn at 999 MW) (1)
kW, MW
Q, Q1, Q2, Q3
±(0.8 % Sn at 999 Mvar) (1)
kvar, Mvar
S, S1, S2, S3
0.8 % Sn at 999 MVA (1)
kVA, MVA
Resolution 0.1 kW 0.1 kvar 0.1 kVA
Accuracy ±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 Sn (2) ±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 Sn (3) ±1 % from 0.3 to 1.5 Sn
±3 % from 0.1 to 0.3 Sn (2) ±3 % from 0.1 to 0.3 Sn (3) ±3 % from 0.1 to 0.3 Sn
Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical) 1 second (typical) 1 second (typical)
(1) Sn = 3Unp.In.
(2) In, Unp, Cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(3) In, Unp, Cos ϕ < 0.6 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
38 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Peak demand active
and reactive power
Power factor (cos ϕ)
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: 2
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Resetting to zero
b via the clear key on the Sepam display if a peak demand is displayed
b via the clear command in the SFT2841 software
b via the communication link (remote control order TC5).
Characteristics
Demand active power Demand reactive power
Measurement range ±(1.5 % Sn at 999 MW) (1) ±(1.5 % Sn at 999 Mvar) (1)
Units kW, MW kvar, Mvar
Resolution 0.1 kW 0.1 kvar
Accuracy ±1 %, typical (2) ±1 % typical (3)
Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits
Integration period 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
(1) Sn = 3Unp.In.
(2) At In, Unp, cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(3) At In, Unp, cos ϕ < 0.6 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range -1 at 1 IND/CAP
Resolution 0.01
CEI Convention. Accuracy (1) 0.01 typical
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, Unp, cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 39
Metering functions Active and reactive energy
2 Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Active energy Reactive energy
Metering capacity 0 to 2.1 108 MW.h 0 to 2.1 108 Mvar.h
Units MW.h Mvar.h
Resolution 0.1 MW.h 0.1 Mvar.h
Accuracy ±1 % typical (1) ±1 % typical (1)
Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits
(1) At In, Unp, cos ϕ > 0.8 under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Readout
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Active energy Reactive energy
Metering capacity 0 to 2.1 108 MW.h 0 to 2.1 108 Mvar.h
Units MW.h Mvar.h
Resolution 0.1 MW.h 0.1 Mvar.h
Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits
Increment 0.1 kW.h to 5 MW 0.1 kvar.h to 5 Mvar.h
Pulse 15 ms min. 15 ms min.
40 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Temperature
Operation
This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature
detectors (RTDs):
b platinum Pt100 (100 Ω at 0 °C or 32 °F) in accordance with the IEC 60751 and
DIN 43760 standards
b nickel 100 Ω or 120 Ω (at 0 °C or 32 °F).
Each RTD channel gives one measurement:
tx = RTD x temperature.
The function also indicates RTD faults:
b RTD disconnected (t > 205 °C or t > 401 °F)
b RTD shorted (t < -35 °C or t < -31 °F).
In the event of a fault, display of the value is inhibited.
2
The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key, in °C or °F
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Range -30 °C to +200 °C -22 °F to +392 °F
Resolution 1 °C 1 °F
Accuracy ±1 °C from +20 °C to +140 °C ±1.8 °F from +68 °F to +284 °F
±2 °C from -30 °C to +20 °C ±3.6 °F from -22 °F to +68 °F
±2 °C from +140 °C to +200 °C ±3.6 °F from +284 °F to +392 °F
Refresh interval 5 seconds (typical)
SEPED303001EN 41
Metering functions Rotation speed
Operation
This function gives the rotation speed of a motor or generator rotor. It is calculated
by measurement of the time between two pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor
at each passage of a cam driven by the rotation of the motor or generator shaft. The
number of pulses per rotation is set in the "particular characteristics" screen of the
SFT2841 software. The proximity sensor is connected to logic input I104.
DE10359
2
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Range 0 to 7200 rpm
Resolution 1 rpm
Accuracy ±1 rpm
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Pulses per rotation (R) 1 to 1800 with Ωn R/60 y1500
(Ωn: rated speed in rpm)
Proximity sensor Pass-band (in Hz) > 2.Ωn R/60
Output 24 to 250 V DC, 3 mA minimum
Leakage current < 0.5 mA
in open status
Voltage dip in closed status < 4 V (with 24 V DC power supply)
Pulse duration 0 status > 120 μs
1 status > 200 μs
42 SEPED303001EN
Metering functions Phasor diagram
Operation
This function displays a phasor diagram of the fundamental component of the current
and voltage measurements as acquired by Sepam without any correction. It provides
effective assistance in the checking of cables and the implementation of directional
and differential protection functions.
It is fully parameterizable and the following choices are proposed to adapt the phasor
diagram according to requirements:
b choice of measurements to be displayed in the phasor diagram
b choice of reference phasor
b choice of display mode.
Measurements to be displayed
2
b phase currents on main and additional channel
b residual currents measured or with sum on main and additional channels
b symmetrical components of current Id, Ii, I0Σ/3
b phase-to-neutral voltages on main and additional channels
b phase-to-phase voltages on main and additional channels
b residual voltages on main and additional channels
b symmetrical components of voltage Vd, Vi, V0/3.
Reference phasor
The reference phasor according to which the phase shifts of the other phasors
displayed are calculated may be chosen from the phase or residual current or voltage
phasors. When the reference phasor is too small (< 2 % In for currents or 5 % Un for
voltages), display is impossible.
Display mode
b Display as true values: the measurements are displayed without any modification
PE50453
Readout
All of the possibilities described above may be accessed via the SFT2841 setting and
operating software.
Two predefined displays are available on the mimic-based UMI:
b display of the three phase currents and three phase-to-neutral voltages of the main
channels
b display of the three phase currents of the main channels and the three phase
currents of the additional channels
Characteristics
Diagram display options of an SFT2841 phasor diagram
Measurements to be displayed
Multiple selection from: I1, I2, I3, I0, I0Σ, Id, Ii, I0Σ/3, I'1, I'2, I'3, I'0, I'0Σ
V1, V2, V3, V0, U21, U32Σ, U13, Vd, Vi, V0/3
V'1, V'2, V'3, V'0, U'21, U'32, U'13
Reference phasor
Single choice from: I1, I2, I3, I0, I0Σ, I'0, I'0Σ
V1, V2, V3, V0, U21, U32, U13,
V'1, V'2, V'3, V'0, U'21, U'32, U'13
Display mode
Current display true (true value)
/ max (value normalized in relation to maximum)
= 1 (normalized to 1)
Voltage display true (true value)
/ max (value normalized in relation to maximum)
= 1 (normalized to 1)
Phase-to-phase voltage star/delta
Display of scale yes/no
SEPED303001EN 43
Network diagnosis Tripping context
functions Tripping current
Tripping context
Operation
This function gives the values at the time of tripping (activation of the tripping contact
on output O1) to enable analysis of the cause of the fault.
Values available on the Sepam display:
b tripping currents TRIPI et TRIPI’
b residual currents I0, I’0, I0Σ and I’0Σ
b differential and through currents
2 b phase-to-phase voltages
b residual voltage
b neutral point voltage
b third harmonic neutral point or residual voltage
b frequency
b active power
b reactive power
b apparent power.
b phase rotation direction 1-2-3/1-3-2
In addition to the values available on the Sepam display, the following values are
available with the SFT2841 software:
b phase-to-neutral voltages
b negative sequence voltage
b positive sequence voltage.
The values for the last five trips are stored with the date and time of tripping.
They are saved in the event of a power failure.
Once 5 tripping contexts have been stored, the following new tripping value
overwrites the oldest tripping context in the memory.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip:
b TRIPI1: phase 1 current (main channels)
b TRIPI2: phase 2 current (main channels)
b TRIPI3: phase 3 current (main channels)
b TRIPI’1: phase 1 current (additional channels)
tripping order
b TRIPI’2: phase 2 current (additional channels)
30 ms b TRIPI’3: phase 3 current (additional channels).
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms
T0 t
interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1.
Tripping current (TRIPI1) acquisition.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.1 to 40 In (1)
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±5 % ±1 digit
Display format 3 significant digits
(1) In, rated current set in the general settings.
44 SEPED303001EN
Network diagnosis Number of phase fault trips
functions Number of earth fault trips
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 65535
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
The number of earth fault trips is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
It may be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 65535
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
SEPED303001EN 45
Network diagnosis Negative sequence / unbalance
functions
Operation
This function gives the negative sequence component: T = Ii/Ib or T’ = I’i/I’b.
The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents:
b 3 phases:
1 ⎛ 2 ⎞
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: I i = --- × ⎝ I1 + a I2
x + aI3⎠
3
1 ⎛ 2 ⎞
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: I i = --- × ⎝ I1 + aI2
x + a I3⎠
3
b 2 phases:
1
2 2
v phase rotation direction 1-2-3: I i = ------- × I1 – a I3
3
1
v phase rotation direction 1-3-2: I i = ------- × I1 – aI3
3
2π
j ------
3
with a = e
When there are no earth faults, the formulas for 2 phase currents are equivalent to
those for 3 phase currents.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 10 to 500 %
Units % Ib or % I’b
Resolution 1%
Accuracy ±2 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
46 SEPED303001EN
Network diagnosis Current total harmonic distortion
functions Voltage total harmonic distortion
2
2
Ithd = 100 % ⎛⎝ --------------⎞⎠ – 1
RMS
H1
with:
RMS = RMS value of current I1 up to the 13th harmonic
H1 = value of the fundamental of current I1
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 100 %
Units %
Resolution 0.1 %
Accuracy (1) ±1 % at In for Ithd > 2 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 100 %
Units %
Resolution 0.1 %
Accuracy (1) ±1 % at Un or Vn for Uthd > 2 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 47
Network diagnosis Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ'0, ϕ0Σ
functions Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3
This function gives the phase displacement measured between the residual voltage
and residual current in the trigonometric (counter-clockwise) direction (see diagram).
The measurement is useful during commissioning to check that the directional earth
fault protection unit is connected correctly.
Phase displacement ϕo.
Three values are available:
b ϕ0, angle between V0 and measured I0
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 359°
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2°
Refresh interval 2 seconds (typical)
This function gives the phase displacement between the V1, V2, V3 voltages
and I1, I2, I3 currents respectively, in the trigonometric (counter-clockwise) direction
1 (see diagram).
V1
The measurements are used when Sepam is commissioned to check that the voltage
Phase displacement ϕ1. and current inputs are wired correctly. When the phase-to-phase voltages U21 and
U32 are connected to Sepam and there is no measurement of residual voltage V0,
the residual voltage is presumed to be zero. The function does not operate when only
the voltage U21 or V1 is connected to Sepam.
This function takes into account the convention regarding the direction of flow of
energy in the outgoing and incoming circuits (see "Power measurements").
Therefore, the angles ϕ1, ϕ2 and ϕ3 are adjusted by 180° with respect to the values
acquired by Sepam for the incoming circuits.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 359°
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2°
Refresh interval 2 seconds (typical)
48 SEPED303001EN
Network diagnosis Disturbance recording
functions
Operation
This function is used to record analog signals and logical states.
The storage of recordings is activated by one or more events set using the SFT2841
software.
The stored event begins before the event and continues afterwards.
Recordings comprise the following information:
b values sampled from the different signals
b date
b characteristics of the recorded channels.
The names of the logic input and output data used in Logipam are also used in
disturbance recording for ease of reading.
The duration and number of recordings may be set using the SFT2841 software tool.
2
The files are recorded in FIFO (First In First Out) type shift storage: when the
maximum number of recordings is reached, the oldest recording is erased when a
new recording is triggered.
Transfer
Files may be transferred locally or remotely:
b locally: using a PC which is connected to the front panel and includes the SFT2841
software tool
b remotely: using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control
system.
Recovery
The signals are recovered from a recording by means of the Wavewin-SE software tool.
Block diagram
stored record
MT10181
time
triggering event
Characteristics
Recording content Set-up file:
date, channel characteristics, measuring chain
transformer ratio
Sample file:
recorded signals
Sampling frequency (1) 12 or 36 samples per network period
Analog signals recorded (2) I1, I2, I3, I0, I’1, I’2, I’3, I’0 current channels
V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32, V’1, V’2, V’3, U’21, U’32 phase
voltage channels
V0, Vnt or V’0 residual voltage channels
Logical states recorded (1) (3) Some or all of the following data is recorded:
b all logic inputs / outputs
b all GOOSE logic inputs G401 to G416 and G501 to
G516 (if recording configured in SFT2841 software
disturbance recording screen)
b pick-up signal
b 1 data item configurable by the logic equation editor
(V_FLAGREC)
or 15 data items configurable by Logipam
(V_FLAGREC, V_FLAGREC2 to V_FLAGREC15)
Number of recordings stored (1) 1 to 19
Total duration of a recording (1) 1 s to 20 s if using a standard cartridge
1 s to 32 s if using an extended cartridge
Maximum recording capacity With an MMS020 standard memory cartridge:
(dist. rec. memory usage = 100 %) b 22 s at 50 Hz, 12 samples per period
b 18 s at 60 Hz, 12 samples per period
b 7 s at 50 Hz, 36 samples per period
b 6 s at 60 Hz, 36 samples per period
With an MMR020 extended memory cartridge:
b 35 s at 50 Hz, 12 samples per period
b 28 s at 60 Hz, 12 samples per period
b 11 s at 50 Hz, 36 samples per period
b 9 s at 60 Hz, 36 samples per period
Periods recorded before triggering 0 to 99 periods
event (1)
File format COMTRADE - IEC60255-24 Ed 1 - 2001
(1) To be set using the SFT2841 software.
(2) According to type and connection of sensors.
(3) According to Sepam hardware configuration.
SEPED303001EN 49
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions
Operation
This function is used to record and back up a set of measurements available in the
Sepam relay, in the form of a COMTRADE file. The number of backed-up files and
the number of measurements per file depend on the type of cartridge installed. The
recording mode and selection of measurements can be configured by the user via the
Back up any existing files before changing the DLG SFT2841 software.
function parameter settings as this will result in loss of The files are saved in a FIFO memory (First In First Out): when the maximum number
the existing files. of files is reached, a new file replaces the oldest.
Any change to the Sepam time affects the Data logs Using the DLG function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's active
2
because the time system in which they operate will protection functions.
have changed.
If a Data log (in Circular or Limited mode) is in progress, Transfer
the corresponding operating mode is as follows: The files can be retrieved on a medium external to the Sepam locally or remotely:
the Data log is stopped Locally: using a PC connected to the programming port and running the SFT2841
the user must explicitly reset the command he has software
triggered before being able to trigger another one. Remotely: when the Sepam has the ACE850 and ACE969 communication
modules (TP and FO) and a dedicated supervision system program.
Only completed files can be transferred. A remote indication data item is created at
the end of recording.
Read
The files can be viewed after being transferred to a PC using software compatible
with the COMTRADE format.
Operating modes
After starting up the DLG function, the measurements are captured continuously. The
stop condition and file management differ according to which of the following 2 modes
is used:
Limited (default mode): the DLG function stops automatically when the end of
recording time is reached or on receipt of an external event (a logic input for
example). However, the method used to stop must be the same as that used for start-
up. Thus, it is not possible to start a Data log using the SFT2841 software and stop
it with a remote control order (TC)
Circular: the file content is managed in a FIFO memory: when the file is full, the
write operation continues and starts again at the start of the file. Stopping the write
operation only results from an external event. In the absence of the stop command,
recording is continuous.
These 2 modes are exclusive: it is not possible to have a Data log configured in
Limited mode simultaneously with a Data log configured in Circular mode.
Space not
DE81242
4
T
T
AR
AR
T
ST
ST
AR
ST
1 2
3 STOP
Data log in Limited mode.
50 SEPED303001EN
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions
DE81243
2
file1 file2 file3 file4 file5 file6 file7
1 Triggering event
Data log in Circular mode. 2
The figure below illustrates the principle of padding on a short-lived interruption and
a prolonged interruption for a Data log configured in Circular mode.
1
DE81244
Downgraded operation
In the event of loss of the power supply during execution of the Data log function,
storage is interrupted then automatically restarted when the power supply returns.
In both Limited and Circular configuration modes, on restarting the value 0x8000 is
recorded in the file as a padding value for the period of non-operation.
The figure below illustrates the principle of padding on a short-lived interruption and
a prolonged interruption for a Data log configured in Limited mode.
The principle of padding does not apply to a Data log configured in Limited mode and
deliberately stopped by the user prior to completion.
DE81245
Padding
Case 1 “Limited” data log no. 1
Padding
Case 2 “Limited” data log no. 2 End of data log
SEPED303001EN 51
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions
DE81246DE81246
Padding
2 Resumption
DE81247
Padding Padding
2 Resumption
Characteristics
Configuration parameters
Content of a COMTRADE file Configuration file (*.CFG):
date, variable characteristics, transformation ratio of the
selected variable values
Samples file (*.DAT):
recorded variables
Total file duration 1 s to 30 days
Sampling period 1 s to 24 hours
Variables available for recording See the table of available data below.
Number of files 1 to 20
Number of variables per file 1 to 15
Source of starting and stopping b SFT 2841 software
b Logic equation or Logipam
b Remote communication
b Logic or GOOSE input
File format COMTRADE - IEC60255-24 Ed 1 - 2001
Note: These parameters are configured with the SFT2841 software.
The following measurements, when available in the Sepam relay, can be selected using the
SFT2841 software.
Available measurements Designation Units
Current
Phase current I1 A
(main inputs) I2
I3
Phase current I’1 A
(additional inputs) I’2
I’3
Measured residual current I0m, I’0m A
Calculated residual current I0c, I’0c A
Demand current I1ave, A
I2ave,
I3ave
Peak demand current I1max, A
I2max,
I3max
52 SEPED303001EN
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions
Phase-to-phase voltages
(additional inputs)
U13
U’21
U’32
V 2
U’13
Residual voltage V0 V
V’0
Neutral-point voltage Vnt V
Positive-sequence voltage Vd V
V’d
Negative-sequence voltage Vi V
V’i
Frequency F Hz
F’
Energy
Active power P MW
Active peak demand power Pmax MW
Active power per phase P1 MW
P2
P3
Reactive power Q Mvar
Reactive peak demand power Qmax Mvar
Reactive power per phase Q1 Mvar
Q2
Q3
Apparent power S MVA
Apparent power per phase S1 MVA
S2
S3
Power factor (cos ϕ) cosPhi
Active energy meter (+ and -) Eam+ MW.h
Eam-
Calculated active energy meter Eac+ MW.h
(+ and -) Eac-
Reactive energy meter (+ and -) Erm+ Mvar.h
Erm-
Calculated reactive energy meter Erc+ Mvar.h
(+ and -) Erc-
Other
Rotor speed of rotation meas.speed rpm
Temperature T1 to T16 ° C /° F
Network diagnosis
Unbalance ratio Ii / Ib % Ib or %
I’b
Current THD Ithd %
Voltage THD Uthd %
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕ’0, ϕ0Σ ϕ0, ϕ’0, ϕ0Σ °
Phase displacement ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 ϕ1, ϕ2, ϕ3 °
SEPED303001EN 53
Network diagnosis Data log (DLG)
functions
54 SEPED303001EN
Network diagnosis Synchro-check:
functions voltage comparison and
out-of-sync context
Operation
Voltage comparison
For the synchro-check function (ANSI 25), the MCS025 module continuously
measures the amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages to
be checked, Usynch1 and Usynch2.
The measurement of the differences between the 2 voltages is useful to implement
the function and identify the value that is impeding synchronization. The differences
are calculated in the following order: amplitude, frequency and phase. As soon as a
difference is greater than the threshold set in the synchro-check function, the
following differences are not calculated.
2
Out-of-sync context
Out-of-sync context gives a precise indication of the cause of the failure of a
synchronization request.
It is only provided when the switchgear control function with the "closing with
synchro-check" option is activated.
Readout
The amplitude, frequency and phase differences and out-of-sync context may be
accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Amplitude difference
Measurement range 0 to 120 % of Usynch1 (or Vsynch1)
Unit % of Usynch1 (or Vsynch1)
Resolution 0.1 %
Accuracy ±2 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Frequency difference
Measurement range 0 to 10 Hz
Unit Hz
Resolution 0.01 Hz
Accuracy 0.05 Hz
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Phase difference
Measurement range 0 to 359°
Unit °
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2°
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
SEPED303001EN 55
Machine operation Thermal capacity used
assistance functions Cooling time constant
2 The thermal capacity used is saved in the event of a Sepam power outage. The
saved value is used again after the outage.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Resetting to zero
The thermal capacity used may be reset to zero, after entry of a password, on:
b the Sepam display via the clear key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 800 %
Units %
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1%
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 5 to 600 min
Units min
Resolution 1 min
Accuracy ±5 %
Display format 3 significant digits
56 SEPED303001EN
Machine operation Operating time before tripping
assistance functions Waiting time after tripping
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key 2
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 999 min
Units min
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 min
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 999 min
Units min
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 min
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
SEPED303001EN 57
Machine operation Running hours and
assistance functions operating time counter
Starting current and starting time
2 Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Range 0 to 65535
Units hours
Characteristics
Starting time
Measurement range 0 to 300 s
Units s or ms
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Starting current
Measurement range 48/51LR active Is to 24 In (1)
48/51LR inactive 1.2 Ib to 24 In (1)
Units A or kA
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Or 65.5 kA.
58 SEPED303001EN
Machine operation Number of starts before inhibition
assistance functions Start inhibit time
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
2
b the communication link.
Resetting to zero
The number of starts counters may be reset to zero, after entry of a password, on:
b the Sepam display via the clear key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 60
Units None
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
If at least one of these functions picks up, a "START INHIBIT" message informs the
user that starting is not allowed.
Readout
The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 360 min
Units min
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 min
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
SEPED303001EN 59
Machine operation Differential current
assistance functions Through current
Differential current
DE50311
Operation
The differential current Id is calculated to facilitate the implementation of the
ANSI 87T and ANSI 87M differential protection functions:
b for a rotating machine (ANSI 87M), it is calculated for each phase by:
Id = I + I′
b when a transformer is used (ANSI 87T), the Id calculation takes into account the
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.015 to 40 In
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Through current
Operation
The through current It is calculated to facilitate the implementation of the ANSI 87T
and ANSI 87M differential protection functions:
b for a rotating machine (ANSI 87M), it is calculated for each phase by:
It I – I′
= ---------------
-
2
b when a transformer is used (ANSI 87T), the It calculation takes into account the
vector shift and transformation ratio:
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.015 to 40 In
Units A or kA
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
60 SEPED303001EN
Machine operation Current phase displacement
assistance functions
Operation
Current phase displacement between the main phase currents (I) and additional
DE50287
phase currents (I') (θ1, θ2, θ3) is calculated for each phase.
The measurements are corrected by taking account of the connection and the
direction of rotation of the phases to create an image of the vector shift, which must
be set in order to use the ANSI 87T differential protection: θi/30 = vector shift.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
2
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 359°
Units °
Resolution 1°
Accuracy (1) ±2°
Display format 3 significant digits
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 61
Machine operation Apparent positive sequence
assistance functions impedance
Apparent phase-to-phase
impedances
Apparent positive sequence impedance
Operation
Apparent positive sequence impedance is used to facilitate the implementation of the
underimpedance field loss protection function (ANSI 40).
Vd
Zd = -----------
Id
Readout
2 The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 200 kΩ
Units Ω
Resolution 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, Un, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
U21
Z21 = -------------- with I21 = I1 – I2
I 21
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 200 kΩ
Units Ω
Resolution 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At In, Un, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
62 SEPED303001EN
Machine operation Third harmonic neutral point
assistance functions voltage
Third harmonic residual voltage
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
2
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.2 to 30 % of Vntp
Units % of Vntp
Resolution 0.1 %
Accuracy (1) ±1 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
The value is used for the implementation of the third harmonic undervoltage
protection function (ANSI 27TN/64G2).
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0.2 to 90 % of Vnp
Units % fo Vnp
Resolution 0.1 %
Accuracy (1) ±1 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 63
Machine operation Capacitance
assistance functions
Operation
This operation gives the total capacitance for each phase of the connected capacitor
bank steps to allow the condition of the capacitors to be monitored.
It covers star and delta connections (parameter set in the "Particular characteristics"
screen of the SFT2841 setting and operating software). For this measurement, the
installation is considered a perfect capacitance, without any consideration of the
resistances added by the connection of the capacitor bank steps.
b Capacitances measured for star-connected capacitor bank steps:
v C1: total capacitance phase 1
v C2: total capacitance phase 2
2 v C3: total capacitance phase 3
b Capacitances measured for delta-connected capacitor bank steps:
v C21: total capacitance between phases 1 and 2
v C32: total capacitance between phases 2 and 3
v C13: total capacitance between phases 3 and 1.
Readout
The capacitance measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 30 F
Unit µF, mF or F
Resolution 0.1 µF
Accuracy ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Accuracy
The measurement accuracy is valid if the resistance and inductance per phase of the
capacitor bank connecting cable (cable between the Sepam CT and the capacitor
bank) respect the following conditions:
b for a star-connected bank:
1 where R is the resistance per phase in Ω
Lω < 0.05 × ------
-
Cω L is the inductance per phase in H
1
R < 0.027 × ------
- ω is the angular frequency in radians/s
Cω C is the total capacitance per phase in F
64 SEPED303001EN
Machine operation Capacitor unbalance current
assistance functions
Operation
This function measures the unbalance current of double star-connected capacitor
DE10412
Characteristics
Step 2
Measurement range 0.02 to 20 I’n
Unit A
Resolution 0.1 A
Accuracy ±5 %
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Step 3
Step 4
SEPED303001EN 65
Machine operation help Motor start report (MSR)
function
Operation
This Data log function, available only in motor applications, is used to view in the form
of curves how some measurements change during motor starting.
The number of measurements and recording duration can be configured using the
SFT2841 software.
Back up any existing files before changing the MSR The files are saved in a FIFO memory (First In First Out): when the maximum number
function parameter settings as this will result in loss of of files is reached, a new file replaces the oldest.
the existing files. Using the Motor start report function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's
active protection functions.
Transfer
The files are transferred locally or remotely:
b Locally: using a PC connected to the programming port and running the SFT2841
software
b Remotely: using a ACE850 and ACE969 communication module (TP and FO) and
a dedicated supervision system program.
Only completed files can be transferred.
Read
The files can be viewed:
b after downloading, on a PC screen, using the WaveWin software
b on the Sepam display using the key then the Diagnosis menu.
In the latter case, depending on the type of Sepam display (integrated advanced UMI
or integrated mimic-based UMI), up to three graphics can be viewed. Each graphic
is used to display 2 curves corresponding to the selected variables using the
SFT2841 software.
1 Time tagging of the selected file and file selection
zone 1
DE81164
2 Name of the 1st variable associated with the Y-axis MSR 2001/01/01 00:59:00.364
3 Selection zone for the variable to be associated
with the Y-axis 447A 11.7kV
4 Maximum value observed for the recorded variable
5 Duration of read time
0.00rpm 447A
Remote
Local
Test
66 SEPED303001EN
Machine operation help Motor start report (MSR)
functions
Input
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Triggering MSR V_MSR_START b b
Output
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
MSR in progress V_MSR_TRIGGED b b
SEPED303001EN 67
Machine operation help Motor start trend (MST)
functions
Operation
This function, only available for motor applications, is related to the Motor start trend
function. It is used to calculate and display in the form of curves the minimum, demand
and maximum values for each value recorded by the Motor start report function
(MSR).
These recalculated values which are stored in a file of 144 samples covering a 30-
day period, can be viewed on the Sepam screen. When the current 30-day period
has ended, it is automatically archived in COMTRADE format and will no longer be
able to be viewed on the Sepam display (see the Read section).
The files are saved in a FIFO memory (First In First Out): when the maximum number
2 of files is reached, a new file replaces the oldest. The number of files available varies
between 12 and 18 depending on the type of memory cartridge installed on Sepam.
The trends are only recalculated at the end of each Motor start report.
MSR
DE81248
MSR1 10 ...
MSR2 20 ...
MSR3 90 ...
Maximum 90 ...
Average 40 ... MST
Minimum 10 ...
1 2 3 144 Samples
Calculating an MST using the available MSRs.
A Motor start report interrupted prior to completion is not taken into account when
calculating the Motor start trend function.
Using the Motor start report function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's
active protection functions.
Comment on managing date changes:
On changing to a date prior to the start date of the current MST, this MST is not
closed and any new MSR will be taken into account in its calculation.
On changing to a date after the end date of the current MST, this MST is closed and
a new MST is created.
Transfer
The files are transferred locally or remotely:
b Locally: using a PC connected to the programming port and running the SFT2841
software
b Remotely: using a ACE850 and ACE969 communication module (TP and FO) and
a dedicated supervision system program.
Only completed files can be transferred.
Downloading an MST file for the current period is automatically cancelled in the
following cases:
b Triggering an MSR
b Triggering calculation of an MST at the end of an MSR.
Downloading an MST file for another period is automatically cancelled when this file
is the oldest and needs to be replaced by a new file due to the FIFO memory being
full.
68 SEPED303001EN
Machine operation help Motor start trend (MST)
functions
Read
b The current file and all completed files can be downloaded and viewed on a PC
screen, using software compatible with the COMTRADE format.
b Only the current file can be viewed on the Sepam display:
1 Press the key
2 Select the Diagnosis menu
3 Press the key
Depending on the type of Sepam display (integrated advanced UMI or integrated
mimic-based UMI), 1 to 3 graphics can be viewed simultaneously. Each graphic can
be used to restore curves representing the change in the minimum, demand and
2
maximum values for the values recorded by the Motor start report function (MSR).
Note: The curve display on Sepam should be used with caution because it does not achieve the
accuracy obtained with COMTRADE file viewing software.
min
2 Id fund <2s>
11.7kV
Vd fund <2s> 4
3
0.00x1
Remote
Local
Test
Block diagrams
MSR no. 5 is incomplete and is not
included in the MST calculation
DE81249
The current MST file is only refreshed when recording of the MSR file is complete.
The current MST file is archived 30 days after its creation. A new MST file is initiated
after the 1st restart in the following period.
SEPED303001EN 69
Machine operation help Motor start trend (MST)
functions
DE81250
MSR1
MSR2
MSR 3
incomplete
Trigger MST
calculation MSR4
max
max
average
average
max
average
min
min
min
Evolution of an MST file during the operating time of the observed motor starts.
Characteristics
Content of a COMTRADE file Configuration file (*.CFG):
date, variable characteristics, transformation ratio of the
selected variable values
Samples file (*.DAT):
recorded variables
Total file duration 30 days/144 samples
Sampling period 5 hours
Variables available for recording See table of available data for the MST function.
Number of files 1 to 12 with standard cartridge
1 to 18 with extended cartridge
File format COMTRADE - IEC60255-24 Ed 1 - 2001
Note: These parameters are configured with the SFT 2841 software.
70 SEPED303001EN
Switchgear diagnosis VT supervision
functions ANSI code 60FL
DE10413
voltage measurement chain:
b voltage transformers
b VT connection to Sepam
b Sepam voltage analog inputs.
There are two units for the function, one for supervision
of the main voltage channel VTs and the other for
supervision of the additional voltage channel VTs.
The function processes the following failures:
2
b partial loss of phase voltages, detected by:
v presence of negative sequence voltage
v and absence of negative sequence current
b loss of all phase voltages, detected by:
v presence of current on one of the three phases
v and absence of all measured voltages
b tripping of the phase VT (and/or residual VT)
protection relay, detected by the acquisition on a logic
input of the fuse blown contact or auxiliary contact of
the circuit breaker protecting the VTs
b other types of failures may be processed using the
logic equation editor.
The "Phase voltage fault" and "Residual voltage fault"
information disappears automatically when the
situation returns to normal, i.e. as soon as:
b the cause of the fault has disappeared
b and all of the measured voltages are present.
Use of circuit breaker closed information
The "circuit breaker closed" information is used to
detect the loss of one, two or three voltages, if it is
connected to a logic input.
Block diagram: residual voltage fault detection.
In certain applications, the position of the circuit
breaker is not sufficient to determine the presence of
DE10414
The behavior of the protection functions in the event of a "Phase voltage fault" or
Residual voltage fault" is to be set up and the following choices are proposed:
b for protection functions 21B, 27, 27D, 27TN, 32P, 32Q, 37P, 40, 47, 50/27, 51V,
59N, 59, 78PS: inhibition or no inhibition
b for protection function 67: inhibition or non-directional operation (50/51)
b for protection function 67N/67NC: inhibition or non-directional operation
(50N/ 51N).
SEPED303001EN 71
Switchgear diagnosis VT supervision
functions ANSI code 60FL
Setting advice
The partial loss of voltages is based on the detection of the presence of negative
sequence voltage and the absence of negative sequence current.
By default:
b the presence of negative sequence voltage is detected when: Vi > 10 % Vnp (Vsi)
b the absence of negative sequence current is detected when: Ii < 5 % In (Isi)
b time delay T1 is 1 s.
These default settings ensure the stability of the VT supervision function in the event
of short-circuits or transient phenomena on the network.
The Isi set point may be raised for highly unbalanced networks.
2 Time delay T1 is to be set shorter than the voltage and power protection function
tripping times.
Time delay T2 for the detection of the loss of all voltages must be longer than the time
it takes for a short-circuit to be cleared by the protection function 50/51 or 67, to avoid
the detection of a VT loss of voltage fault triggered by a 3-phase short-circuit.
The time delay for the 51V protection function must be longer than the T1 and T2 time
delays used for the detection of voltage losses.
Characteristics
Validation of the detection of partial loss of phase voltages
Setting Yes / No
Vsi set point
Setting 10 % to 100 % of Vnp
Accuracy ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Pick-up / drop-out ratio 95 % ±2.5 %
Isi set point
Setting 5 % to 100 % of In
Accuracy ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Pick-up / drop-out ratio 105 % ±2.5 % or > (1 + 0.01 In/Isi) x 100 %
Time delay T1 (partial loss of phase voltages)
Setting 0.1 s to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Validation of the detection of the loss of all phase voltages
Setting Yes / No
Detection of the loss of all voltages with verification of the presence of current
Setting Yes / No
Voltage presence detected by
Setting Breaker closed / Logic equation or Logipam
Time delay T2 (loss of all voltages)
Setting 0.1 s to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Voltage and power protection behavior
Setting No action / inhibition
Protection 67 behavior
Setting Non-directional / inhibition
Protection 67N/67NC behavior
Setting Non-directional / inhibition
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Phase VT fault PVTS_x_103 b b
Inhibition of function PVTS_x_113 b b
Voltage presence PVTS_x_117 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Function output PVTS_x_3 b b b
Function inhibited PVTS_x_16 b b
Note: x = unit number: x = 1: main channels (V).
x = 2: additional channels (V’).
72 SEPED303001EN
Switchgear diagnosis CT supervision
functions ANSI code 60
Operation
The CT (Current Transformer) supervision function is used to supervise the complete
phase current measurement chain:
b phase current sensors (1 A/5 A CTs or LPCTs)
b phase current sensor connection to Sepam
b Sepam phase current analog inputs.
There are two units for the function, one for supervision of the main current channel
CTs (I) and the other for supervision of the additional current channel CTs (I’).
The function is inactive if only 2 phase current sensors are connected.
The "Main CT fault" or "Additional CT fault" information disappears automatically
when the situation returns to normal, i.e. as soon as the three phase currents are
2
measured and have values greater than 10 % of In.
In the event of the loss of a phase current, the following protection functions may be
inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping:
b 21B, 46, 40, 32P, 37P, 32Q, 78PS, 64REF
b 51N and 67N, if I0 is calculated by the sum of the phase currents.
Block diagram
DE10415
Characteristics
Time delay
Setting 0.15 s to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or ± 25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Inhibition of protection functions 21B, 32P, 32Q, 37P, 40, 46, 51N, 64REF, 67N, 78PS
Setting No action / inhibition
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Inhibition of function PCTS_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Delayed output PCTS_x_3 b b b
Phase 1 fault PCTS_x_7 b b
Phase 2 fault PCTS_x_8 b b
Phase 3 fault PCTS_x_9 b b
Function inhibited PCTS_x_16 b b
Note: x = unit number: x = 1: main channels (l).
x = 2: additional channels (l’).
SEPED303001EN 73
Switchgear diagnosis Trip and closing circuit
functions supervision
ANSI code 74
DE50111
Block diagram
DE81062
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Trip circuit supervision fault V_TCS b b
74 SEPED303001EN
Switchgear diagnosis Trip and closing circuit
functions supervision
ANSI code 74
Operation
This function monitors closing coil continuity. It calls for the wiring diagram opposite,
connected to a logic input configured with the "Closing coil supervision" function.
The information is accessible in the matrix ("closing circuit" message) and via remote
indication TS234.
Block diagram
2
DE10417
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Control fault V_CTRLFAUT b b
(circuit breaker monitoring)
SEPED303001EN 75
Switchgear diagnosis Auxiliary power supply monitoring
functions
Operation
The auxiliary power supply is an important factor in cubicle operation. This function
monitors it by measuring the Sepam power supply voltage and comparing the
measured value to a low and high threshold. If the value is outside the thresholds, an
alarm is generated. The related information is available in the matrix and in Logipam.
Block diagram
DE10418
2 Sepam power
supply (Vaux)
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measured auxiliary voltage Vaux, Low threshold alarm, High threshold alarm
Measurement range 20 to 275 V DC
Units V
Resolution 0.1 V (1 V on display)
Accuracy ±10 % or ±4 V
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Rated auxiliary voltage
Setting 24 to 250 V DC
Resolution 1V
Low threshold
Setting 60 to 95 % of rated V (minimum 20 V)
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±10 % or ±4 V
High threshold
Setting 105 to 150 % of rated V (maximum 275 V)
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±10 % or ±4 V
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Auxiliary power supply V_VAUX_ON b
monitoring on
High threshold alarm V_VAUX_HIGH b b
Low threshold alarm V_VAUX_LOW b b
76 SEPED303001EN
Switchgear diagnosis Cumulative breaking current
functions Number of operations
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Cumulative breaking current measured
Range 0 to 65535 (kA)2
Units primary (kA)2
Resolution 1(kA)2
Accuracy (1) ±10 % ±1 digit
Alarm set point
Setting 0 to 65535 (kA)2
Resolution 1(kA)2
Accuracy (1) ±10 % ±1 digit
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Cumulative breaking current V_MAXBRKCUR b b
threshold overrun
(1) At In, under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Number of operations
Operation
The function also gives the total number of breaking device operations.
It is activated by tripping orders (O1 relay).
The number of operations is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
It may be reinitialized using the SFT2841 software.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Range 0 to 4.109
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
SEPED303001EN 77
Switchgear diagnosis Operating time
functions Charging time
Operating time
Operation
This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device (1)v
defined with the open command (O1 relay) and change of status of the device open
position contact connected to the I102 input (2) .
The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
Readout
Characteristics
Measurement range 20 to 300
Units ms
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy ±1 ms typical
Display format 3 significant digits
Charging time
Operation
This function gives the value of the breaking device (1) operating mechanism charging
time, determined according to the device closed position status change contact and
the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam logic inputs (2).
The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the Sepam display via the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
(1) Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.
(2) Optional MES120 module.
Characteristics
Measurement range 1 to 20
Units s
Resolution 1s
Accuracy ±0.5 s
Display format 3 significant digits
78 SEPED303001EN
Switchgear diagnosis Number of racking out operations
functions
Operation
This function keeps a count of circuit breaker or contactor rackouts.
The information may be used for breaking device maintenance.
The breaking device "racked out" or "disconnected" position must be wired to a logic
input and set up in the SFT2841 software in order for rackouts to be counted.
The number of rackouts is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure. It may be
reinitialized using the SFT2841 software.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
2
Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 65535
Units None
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
SEPED303001EN 79
Protection functions Contents
Setting ranges 82
Overspeed 89
ANSI code 12 89
Underspeed 90
ANSI code 14 90
Underimpedance 91
ANSI code 21B 91
Overfluxing (V/Hz) 92
ANSI code 24 92
Synchro-check 94
ANSI code 25 94
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 96
3 Code ANSI 27
Positive sequence undervoltage and
96
80 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Contents
SEPED303001EN 81
Protection functions Setting ranges
82 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Setting ranges
SEPED303001EN 83
Protection functions Setting ranges
84 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Setting ranges
SEPED303001EN 85
Protection functions Setting ranges
3 Measurement origin
IDMT (IDMT; reset time)
I0 input, I’0 input, sum of phase currents I0Σ or sum of phase currents I’0Σ
0.5 s to 20 s
86 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Setting ranges
SEPED303001EN 87
Protection functions Setting ranges
88 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Overspeed
ANSI code 12
Block diagram
3
DE50764
Characteristics
Settings
Set point Ωs
Setting range 100 to 160 % of Ωn
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 95 %
Time delay T
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±25 ms or ±(60000/(Ωs (2) x R (3))) ms
Resolution 1s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P12_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P12_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P12_x_1 b b
Delayed output P12_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P12_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Ωs in rpm.
(3) R: Number of pulses (cam) per rotation.
SEPED303001EN 89
Protection functions Underspeed
ANSI code 14
by a proximity sensor at each passage of one or more cams driven by the rotation of
the motor or generator shaft (see a more in-depth description in the "Metering
functions" chapter).
The speed-acquisition and zero-speed detection parameters must be set on the
"Particular characteristics" screen of the SFT2841 software.
The "Rotor speed measurement" function must be assigned to logic input I104 for the
function to work.
The protection function picks up if the speed measured drops below the speed set
point after having first exceeded the set point by 5 %. Zero speed is detected by unit
1 and is used by protection function 48/51 LR to detect rotor locking.
The protection includes a definite (DT) time delay T.
3 Block diagram
DE51539
Characteristics
Settings
Set point Ωs
Setting range 10 to 100 % of Ωn
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Time delay T
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±25 ms or ±(60000/(Ωs (2) x R (3))) ms
Resolution 1 s with T>(60/(Ωs (2) x R (3)))
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P14_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P14_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P14_x_1 b b
Delayed output P14_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P14_x_16 b b
Zero speed P14_x_38 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Ωs in rpm.
(3) R: Number of pulses (cam) per rotation.
90 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Underimpedance
ANSI code 21B
U 21 U 32 U 13
Z 21 = ---------------- , Z 32 = ---------------- , Z 13 = ---------------- .
I1 – I2 I2 – I3 I3 – I1
Block diagram
DE51540
Characteristics
Settings
Set point Ωs
Setting range 0.05Vn/Ib y Zs y 2 Vn/Ib or 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 0.001 Ω or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Time delay T
Setting range 200 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time pick-up < 35 ms from infinite to Zs/2 (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Reset time < 50 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P21B_1_101 b b
Protection inhibition P21B_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P21B_1_1 b b
Delayed output P21B_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P21B_1_16 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 91
Protection functions Overfluxing (V/Hz)
ANSI code 24
Block diagram
3
DE51541
Machine coupling
This setting adapts the function voltage measurement to the coupling of the magnetic
circuit, depending on the measurements made possible by Sepam wiring.
92 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Overfluxing (V / Hz)
ANSI code 24
Characteristics
DE50718
Settings
Machine coupling
Setting range Delta / star
Tripping curve
Setting range Definite time
IDMT: type A, type B, type C
Gs set point
Setting range 1.03 to 2.0 pu (2)
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 0.01 pu (2)
Drop out/pick up ratio 98 % ±1 %
Time delay T (operation time at 2 pu)
Definite time Setting range 0.1 to 20000 s
Voltage/frequency ratio IDMT tripping curves Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Setting range 0.1 to 1250 s
Resolution
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
10 ms or 1 digit
3
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time pick-up < 40 ms from 0.9 Gs to 1,1 Gs at fn
Overshoot time < 40 ms from 0.9 Gs to 1.1 Gs at fn
Reset time < 50 ms from 1.1 Gs to 0.9 Gs at fn
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P24_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P24_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P24_x_1 b b
Delayed output P24_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P24_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) 1 pu represents 1 x Gn.
Example 2. transformer
A transformer is generally protected by an IDMT set point, set to 1.05 Gn with a long
DE50662
delay.
For example: type C curve, Gs = 1.05 and T = 4 s.
SEPED303001EN 93
Protection functions Synchro-check
ANSI code 25
The function is available in the optional MCS025 module. The "Close enable" logic
data must be cabled to a logic input on the Sepam. All other data and measurements
are transmitted to the Sepam base unit via the CCA785 connection cord.
Block diagram
DE80238
3 dfs
Anticipation
It is possible to anticipate the function by a time Ta, taking into account the frequency
difference and the circuit breaker closing time, in order for the voltages to be
synchronized at the time of coupling.
Voltage checking
When one of the two voltages is absent, coupling may be authorized according to one
of five voltage checking modes.
b Usync1 absent and Usync2 present (Dead1 AND Live2)
b Usync1 present and Usync2 absent (Live1 AND Dead2)
b One voltage is present and the other is absent (Dead1 XOR Dead2)
b One or both of the two voltages are absent (Dead1 OR Dead2)
b Both voltages are absent (Dead1 AND Dead2).
The presence of each of the voltages is detected by comparing the voltage to the
high set point (Us high). The absence of either of the voltages is detected by
comparing the voltage to the low set point (Us low).
94 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Synchro-check
ANSI code 25
User information
The following measurements are available:
b voltage difference
b frequency difference
b phase difference.
Characteristics
Settings
dUs set point
Setting range 3 % Unsync1 to 30 % Unsync1
Accuracy (1) ±2.5 % or 0,003 Unsync1
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 %
dfs set point
Setting range 0.05 Hz to 0.5 Hz
±10 mHz
Accuracy (1)
Resolution
Drop out/pick up
0.01 Hz
< 15 mHz
3
dPhis set point
Setting range 5° to 50°
Accuracy (1) ±2°
Resolution 1°
Drop out/pick up ratio 120 %
Us high set point
Setting range 70 % Unsync1 to 110 % Unsync1
Accuracy (1) ±1 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 %
Us low set point
Setting range 10 % Unsync1 to 70 % Unsync1
Accuracy (1) ±1 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 %
Anticipation of circuit breaker closing time
Setting range 0 to 500 ms
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Voltage checking
Setting range In service / Out of service
Operating mode with no voltage
Setting range Dead1 AND Live2
Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 XOR Dead2
Dead1 OR Dead2
Dead1 AND Dead2
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time < 190 ms
dU operation time < 120 ms
df operation time < 190 ms
dPhi operation time < 190 ms
Reset time < 50 ms
Outputs (1)
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Close enable
Synchro-check P25_1_46 b b
No voltage P25_1_47 b b
Phase difference P25_1_49 b b
Frequency difference P25_1_50 b b
Voltage difference P25_1_51 b b
No Usync1 P25_1_52 b b
No Usync2 P25_1_53 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 95
Protection functions Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)
Code ANSI 27
DE51543
Operation
Protection against voltage dips or detection of
abnormally low voltage in order to:
b Trigger automatic load shedding
b Trigger a source transfer
b Disconnect a generator, in conformity with a "Grid
code".
It includes a time delay T with:
b definite time (DT)
b inverse definite minimum time (see the tripping curve
equation on page 226)
b definite time with a curve T(U/Un) that can be
customized point by point.
0.8 Setting range 5 % of Unp (or Vnp) to 100 % of Unp (or Vnp)
0.7 Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±0,005 Unp
0.6
U/Un
Resolution 1%
0.5
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 103 % ±2 %
0.4
Time delay T (tripping time for zero voltage)
0.3
0.2 Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
0.1 Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
0 Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
0 0.5 1 1.5 Characteristic times
Tc in sec
Operating time Pick-up < 40 ms from 1.1 Us (Vs) to 0.9 Us (Vs)
(25 ms typical)
"Grid code" curve. Overshoot time < 40 ms from 1.1 Us (Vs) to 0.9 Us (Vs)
Reset time < 50 ms from 0.9 Us (Vs) to 1.1 Us (Vs)
Connection conditions Inputs
Connection type V1, V2, V3 (1) U21, U32 U21, U32 Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
+ V0
Operation in YES YES NO Reset protection P27_x_101 b b
phase-to-neutral voltage
Operation in YES YES YES Inhibit protection P27_x_113 b b
phase-to-phase voltage Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Connection type U21 (1) V1 (1) Instantaneous output (pick-up) P27_x_1 b b
Operation in phase-to- NO On V1 only Time-delayed output P27_x_3 b b b
neutral voltage
Operation in phase-to- On U21 NO Phase 1 fault (2) P27_x_7 b b
phase voltage only Phase 2 fault (2) P27_x_8 b b
(1) With or without V0. Phase 3 fault (2) P27_x_9 b b
Protection inhibited P27_x_16 b b
Instantaneous output V1 or U21 P27_x_23 b b
Instantaneous output V2 or U32 P27_x_24 b b
Instantaneous output V3 or U13 P27_x_25 b b
Delayed output V1 or U21 P27_x_26 b b
Delayed output V2 or U32 P27_x_27 b b
Delayed output V3 or U13 P27_x_28 b b
x: Unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) When the protection in used is phase-to-neutral voltage.
96 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Positive sequence
undervoltage and phase rotation
direction check
ANSI code 27D
Motor protection against incorrect voltages. Description
Protection of motors against faulty operation due to insufficient or unbalanced
network voltage. It is based on measurement of the positive sequence voltage Vd.
It includes a definite time delay T.
It does not operate when only a single phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltage is
connected.
This protection also detects the phase rotation direction. The protection function
considers that the phase rotation direction is reversed when the positive sequence
voltage is less than 10 % of Unp and when the phase-to-phase voltage is greater
than 80 % of Unp. When this is the case, the alarm message "ROTATION –" is
generated.
Block diagram
DE51544
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (U) / Additional channels (U’)
Vsd set point
Setting range 15 % Unp to 60 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 103 % ±2 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms from 1.1 Vsd to 0.9 Vsd
Overshoot time < 40 ms from 1.1 Vsd to 0.9 Vsd
Reset time < 50 ms from 0.9 Vsd to 1.1 Vsd
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P27D_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P27D_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P27D_x_1 b b
Delayed output P27D_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P27D_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 97
Protection functions Remanent undervoltage
ANSI code 27R
Block diagram
DE50768
Characteristics
Settings
3 Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (U) / Additional channels (U’)
Us set point
Setting range 5 % Unp to 100 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 103 % ±2 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 45 ms from 1.1 Us to 0.9 Us
Overshoot time < 35 ms from 1.1 Us to 0.9 Us
Reset time < 35 ms from 0.9 Us to 1.1 Us
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P27R_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P27R_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P27R_x_1 b b
Delayed output P27R_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P27R_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
98 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Third harmonic undervoltage
ANSI code 27TN/64G2
Generator protection against insulation Due to their geometric characteristics, generators produce third-order harmonic
faults. This function should be combined voltages (H3) in addition to the fundamental electromotive force. The amplitude of
the H3 voltage may vary from 0 to 10 % of Vn, as a function of:
with 59N or 51N to ensure 100 % stator b network and generator characteristics
earth fault protection (64G). b the load on the generator. It is generally higher under full-load conditions than
under no-load conditions.
In the absence of a fault, the H3 voltage must be at least 0.2 % of Vn for protection
Description function 27TN.
Protection of generators against phase-to-earth H3 voltage with no fault
insulation faults, by the detection of a reduction of the During normal operation, the H3 voltage is measured at each end of the windings.
third harmonic residual voltage.This function protects 10
to 20 % of the stator winding on the neutral point end.
DE51614
Complete protection of the stator winding is ensured by
combining this function with function 59N or 51N, which
protects 85 to 95 % of the winding on the terminal end.
3
H3 voltage with a fault on the neutral point end
When a single-phase fault occurs in the stator winding near the machine neutral
point, the neutral point impedance is short-circuited which leads to a drop in the H3
voltage on the neutral point end.
DE51615
The third harmonic undervoltage protection function detects the drop in the H3
voltage caused by a single-phase fault on the neutral-point end.
Two types of tripping set points are available according to the sensors connected:
b fixed set point: tripping for H3 neutral point undervoltage. The setting requires
preliminary measurements.
b adaptive set point: tripping for H3 neutral point undervoltage depending on a set
point whose value depends on the H3 residual voltage. The setting does not require
preliminary measurements.
Availability of set points depending on the sensors used
Voltage measurements Available types
VT neutral point VT terminals 27TN fixed set point 27TN adaptive set
point
- All wiring - -
b V1 or U21 - -
b U21, U32 b -
b V1, V2, V3 b b
SEPED303001EN 99
Protection functions Third harmonic undervoltage
ANSI code 27TN/64G2
Fixed set point
Characteristics
Settings
Type of set point
Setting range Fixed
Third harmonic voltage set point Vs
Setting range 0.2 to 20 % of Vntp
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.05 V of neutral point Vnts
Resolution 0.1 %
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Time delay
Setting range 0.5 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Ssmin set point
Setting range 1 % to 90 % of 3.Unp.Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Vdsmin positive sequence undervoltage set point
Setting range 50 % to 100 % of Unp
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time typically 140 ms from 2 Vs to 0
Overshoot time < 65 ms
Reset time < 65 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P27TN/64G2_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P27TN/64G2_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Tripping output P27TN/64G2_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P27TN/64G2_x_16 b b
Instantaneous output P27TN/64G2_x_23 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
100 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Third harmonic undervoltage
ANSI code 27TN/64G2
Adaptive set point
Vnt
Operation (adaptive set point)
The H3 voltage (terminal end) V3rΣ is compared to the H3 voltage V3nt measured
DE50325
on the neutral point end. The protection function calculates the H3 residual voltage
using the three phase-to-neutral voltages. Use of the H3 residual voltage is the
means to adapt the tripping set point according to the normal H3 voltage level.
G Time-delayed definite time (DT) tripping occurs when:
K
V 3 nt y ---------------------- × V 3r Σ .
3(1 – K)
The protection function operates only if the neutral point H3 voltage before the fault
3V
is greater than 0.2 % of the network phase-to-neutral voltage and if the positive
sequence voltage is greater than 30 % of the phase-to-neutral voltage.
Adjustment
This function does not require any particular measurements but, in certain cases, it
may be necessary to adjust the K setting.
The Sepam unit measures the neutral point H3 voltage V3nt and the H3 residual
voltage V3rΣ to facilitate adjustment of the protection function.
b V3nt is expressed in % of the primary voltage of the neutral point sensor Vntp
b V3rΣ is expressed in % of the primary voltage of the terminal-side sensors Vnp.
3
If the primary voltages of the sensors are different, V3nt must be adapted to the
terminal-side primary voltage Vnp using the equation:
Vntp
V3nt (%Vnp) = V3nt (%Vntp) x --------------
Vnp
Block diagram
DE51546
Characteristics
Settings
Type of set point
Setting range Adaptive
Time delay
Setting range 0.5 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
K set point
Setting range 0.1 to 0.2
Accuracy (1) ±1 %
Resolution 0.01
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 %
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time typically 140 ms (2)
Overshoot time < 65 ms
Reset time < 65 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P27TN/64G2_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P27TN/64G2_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Tripping output P27TN/64G2_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P27TN/64G2_x_16 b b
Instantaneous output P27TN/64G2_x_23 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Measured for a variation of 2V3nt to 0 with V3rΣ = 30 %.
SEPED303001EN 101
Protection functions Third harmonic undervoltage
ANSI code 27TN/64G2
Adaptive set point
K
- × V3rΣ
Curves ---------------------
3(1 – K)
3 10
15
20
0.37
0.56
0.74
0.41
0.62
0.82
0.45
0.68
0.91
0.50
0.75
1.00
0.54
0.81
1.09
0.59
0.88
1.18
0.63
0.95
1.27
0.68
1.02
1.37
0.73
1.10
1.46
0.78
1.17
1.56
0.83
1.25
1.67
25 0.93 1.03 1.14 1.25 1.36 1.47 1.59 1.71 1.83 1.95 2.08
30 1.11 1.24 1.36 1.49 1.63 1.76 1.90 2.05 2.20 2.35 2.50
40 1.48 1.65 1.82 1.99 2.17 2.35 2.54 2.73 2.93 3.13 3.33
50 1.85 2.06 2.27 2.49 2.71 2.94 3.17 3.41 3.66 3.91 4.17
60 2.22 2.47 2.73 2.99 3.26 3.53 3.81 4.10 4.39 4.69 4.10
70 2.59 2.88 3.18 3.49 3.80 4.12 4.44 4.78 5.12 5.47 5.83
80 2.96 3.30 3.64 3.98 4.34 4.71 5.08 5.46 5.85 6.26 6.67
90 3.33 3.71 4.09 4.48 4.88 5.29 5.71 6.14 6.59 7.04 7.50
DE51618
102 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Directional active overpower
ANSI code 32P
Protection against reverse power and The protection function picks up if the active power flowing in one direction or the
overloads. other (supplied or drawn) is greater than the Ps set point.
It includes a definite time delay T.
It is based on the two or three-wattmeter method, depending on the connection
conditions:
Description b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
Two-way protection based on calculated active power, b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
for the following applications: b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b active overpower protection to detect overloads and b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
allow load shedding b U21, U32 without V0: 2 wattmeters
b reverse active power protection: b other cases: protection function unavailable.
v against generators running like motors when the The function is enabled only if the following condition is met:
generators draw active power P u 3.1 % Q which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event
v against motors running like generators when the of short-circuits.
motors supply active power. The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter,
according to the convention:
b for the feeder circuit:
v power supplied by the busbars is positive 3
DE50769
v power supplied to the busbar is negative
DE50771
DE50770
v power supplied by the busbars is negative.
Block diagram
DE50772
Operating zone.
Characteristics
Settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Overpower/reverse power
Ps set point
Setting range 1 % of Sn (2) to 120 % of Sn (2)
Accuracy (1) ±0.3 % Sn for Ps between 1 % Sn and 5 % Sn
±5 % for Ps between 5 % Sn and 40 % Sn
±3 % for Ps between 40 % Sn and 120 % Sn
Resolution 0.1 kW
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.004 Sn/Ps) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time < 90 ms at 2 Ps
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 Ps
Reset time < 105 ms at 2 Ps
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P32P_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P32P_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P32P_x_1 b b
Delayed output P32P_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P32P_x_16 b b
Positive active power P32P_x_19 b b
Negative active power P32P_x_20 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Sn = 3 Un In.
SEPED303001EN 103
Protection functions Directional reactive overpower
ANSI code 32Q
Protection against field loss on synchronous The protection function picks up if the reactive power flowing in one direction or the
machines. other (supplied or drawn) is greater than the Qs set point.
It includes a definite time delay T.
It is based on the two or three-wattmeter method, depending on the connection
conditions:
Description b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
Two-way protection based on calculated reactive b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b reactive overpower protection for motors which b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
consume more reactive power following field loss b U21, U32 without V0: 2 wattmeters
b reactive power feedback protection for protecting b other cases: protection function unavailable.
generators which consume more reactive power The function is enabled only if the following condition is met:
following field loss. Q u 3.1 % P which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event
of short-circuits.
Assuming the wiring is the same, the power sign is determined according to the
general feeder or incomer parameter, according to the convention:
b for the feeder circuit:
3 v power supplied by the busbars is positive
DE50769
v power supplied to the busbar is negative
DE50773
DE50770
v power supplied by the busbars is negative.
Block diagram
DE50774
Characteristics
Settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Overpower/reverse power
Qs set point
Setting range 5 % of Sn (2) to 120 % of Sn (2)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % for Qs between 5 % Sn and 40 % Sn
Operating zone. ±3 % for Qs between 40 % Sn and 120 % Sn
Resolution 0.1 kW
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1- 0.004 Sn/Qs) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time < 90 ms at 2 Qs
Overshoot time < 95 ms at 2 Qs
Reset time < 95 ms at 2 Qs
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P32Q_1_101 b b
Protection inhibition P32Q_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P32Q_1_1 b b
Delayed output P32Q_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P32Q_1_16 b b
Positive reactive power P32Q_1_54 b b
Negative reactive power P32Q_1_55 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Sn = 3.Un.In.
104 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Phase undercurrent
ANSI code 37
Description
DE50775
Protection of pumps against the consequences of a
loss of priming by detection of motor no-load operation.
Current sag.
3
DE50776
Block diagram
DE50777
SEPED303001EN 105
Protection functions Phase undercurrent
ANSI code 37
Characteristics
Settings
Is set point
Setting range 5 % Ib to 100 % Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 % ±3 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 55 ms from 2 Is to 0.02 In
Overshoot time < 40 ms from 2 Is to 0.02 In
Reset time < 45 ms from 0.02 In to 2 Is
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
3 Protection reset
Protection inhibition
P37_1_101
P37_1_113
b
b
b
b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P37_1_1 b b
Delayed output P37_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P37_1_16 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
106 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Directional active underpower
ANSI code 37P
The protection function picks up if the active power flowing in one direction or the
other (supplied or drawn) is less than the Ps set point.
It includes a definite (DT) time delay T.
It is based on the two or three-wattmeter method, depending on the connection
conditions:
b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b V1, V2, V3 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I2, I3: 3 wattmeters
b U21, U32 + V0 and I1, I3: 2 wattmeters
b U21, U32 without V0: 2 wattmeters
Tripping zone (normal direction).
b other cases: protection function unavailable.
The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter,
according to the convention:
b for the feeder circuit: 3
DE51383
DE50769
v power supplied to the busbars is negative
DE50770
v power supplied by the busbars is negative.
Characteristics
Settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Normal / reverse
Ps set point
Setting range 5 % of Sn (2) to 100 % of Sn (2)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % for Ps between 5 % Sn and 40 % Sn
±3 % for Ps between 40 % Sn and 120 % Sn
Resolution 0.1 kW
Drop out/pick up ratio 106 %
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time < 120 ms
Overshoot time < 65 ms
Reset time < 60 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P37P_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P37P_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P37P_x_1 b b
Delayed output P37P_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P37P_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Sn = 3.Un.In.
SEPED303001EN 107
Protection functions Temperature monitoring
ANSI code 38/49T
Block diagram
DE50778
Characteristics
Settings
Alarm and trip set points TS1, TS2
Setting range 0°C to 180°C 32°F to 356°F
Accuracy (1) ±1.5°C ±2.7°F
Resolution 1°C 1°F
Pick up / drop out difference 3°C 5.4°F
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P38/49T_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P38/49T_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Protection output P38/49T_x_3 b b b
Alarm P38/49T_x_10 b b b
RTD fault P38/49T_x_12 b b
Protection inhibited P38/49T_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
108 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Field loss
ANSI code 40
Vd
Zd = --------
Id
DE50306
Block diagram
DE50825
SEPED303001EN 109
Protection functions Field loss
ANSI code 40
3 Un1
Zn = ------------- .
3Ib
Characteristics
Settings
Common point: Xa
Setting range 0.02Vn/Ib y Xa y 0.20Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ or 0.001 Ω
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Circle 1: Xb
Setting range 0.20Vn/Ib y Xb y 1.40Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 0.001 Ω or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 % ±3 % of circle 1 diameter
Circle 2: Xc
Setting range 0.60Vn/Ib y Xc y 3Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 0.001 Ω or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 105 % ±3 % of circle 2 diameter
T1 time: tripping time delay circle 1
Setting range 50 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
T2 time: tripping time delay circle 2
Setting range 100 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms from 0 to C1 (typically 25 ms)
Pick-up < 40 ms from 0 to C2 (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 50 ms
Reset time < 50 ms (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P40_1_101 b b
Protection inhibition P40_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P40_1_1 b b
Delayed output P40_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P40_1_16 b b
Instantaneous protection 1 (circle 1) P40_1_23 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
110 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Field loss
ANSI code 40
SEPED303001EN 111
Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance
ANSI code 46
Block diagram
DE50839
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (I)
Additional channels (I’)
Tripping curve
Setting range See list above
Is set point
Setting range definite time 10 % to 500 % of Ib or I'b
Schneider IDMT 10 % to 50 % of Ib or I'b
IEC or IEEE IDMT 10 % to 100 % of Ib or I'b
RI2 curve 3 % to 20 % of Ib or I'b
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.004 In
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.005 In/Is) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range definite time 100 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 1 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) definite time ±2 % or ±25 ms
IDMT ±5 % or ±35 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
K (RI2 curve only)
Setting range 1 to 100
Resolution 1
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 55 ms at 2 Is
Overshoot time < 50 ms at 2 Is
Reset time < 55 ms at 2 Is
Inputs
x: unit number. Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode: Protection reset P46_x_101 b b
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.034 to 0.336 Protection inhibition P46_x_113 b b
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.067 to 0.666 Outputs
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.008 to 0.075
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.124 to 1.237
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.415 to 4.142 Instantaneous output (pick-up) P46_x_1 b b
IEEE very inverse: 0.726 to 7.255 Delayed output P46_x_3 b b b
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.231 to 12.30. Protection inhibited P46_x_16 b b
112 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance
ANSI code 46
When this current level is exceeded, the generator can handle a negative sequence
current Ii for a time td, corresponding to the following equation:
K
td = -----------------2
Ii ⎞
3
⎛ ---------
⎝ Ib ⎠
SEPED303001EN 113
Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance
ANSI code 46
50
3 20
10
max. curve (T=1s)
0.5
0.2
0,1
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001 I/Ib
li (% lb) cont. 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
X cont. 5.74 5.42 5.13 4.87 4.64 4.24 3.90 3.61 3.37 3.15 2.96 2.80 2.65 2.52 2.40 2.29
li (% lb) cont. 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370
X cont. 2.14 2.10 2.01 1.94 1.86 1.80 1.74 1.68 1.627 1.577 1.53 1.485 1.444 1.404 1.367 1.332
li (% lb) cont. 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 u 500
X cont. 1.298 1.267 1.236 1.18 1.167 1.154 1.13 1.105 1.082 1.06 1.04 1.02 1
114 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Negative sequence overvoltage
ANSI code 47
Block diagram
DE50779
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (U) / Additional channels (U’)
3
Vsi set point
Setting range 1 % Unp to 50 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 97 % ±1 % or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vsi) x 100 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Vsi
Overshoot time < 50 ms at 2 Vsi
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Vsi
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P47_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P47_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P47_x_1 b b
Delayed output P47_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P47_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 115
Protection functions Excessive starting time, locked
rotor
ANSI code 48/51LR
116 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Excessive starting time, locked
rotor
ANSI code 48/51LR
Characteristics
Settings
Is set point
Setting range 50 % to 500 % of Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
Time delay T
Setting range ST 500 ms to 300 s
LT 50 ms to 300 s
LTS 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms at 2 Is
Resolution 10 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P48/51LR_1_101 b b
Motor re-acceleration P48/51LR_1_102 b b
Protection inhibition
Outputs
P48/51LR_1_113 b b
3
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Protection output P48/51LR_1_3 b b b
Locked rotor P48/51LR_1_13 b b b
Excessive starting time P48/51LR_1_14 b b b
Locked rotor at start-up P48/51LR_1_15 b b b
Protection inhibited P48/51LR_1_16 b b
Starting in progress P48/51LR_1_22 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 117
Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Block diagram
DE80268
User information
The following information is available for the user:
b heat rise
b time before tripping (with constant current).
Characteristics
Settings
Permissible current Ia
Setting range < 1 to 1.73 Ib
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1A
Time constant T
Setting range 1 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P49RMS_1_101 b b
Protection inhibition P49RMS_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Delayed output P49RMS_1_3 b b b
Alarm P49RMS_1_10 b b b
Inhibit closing P49RMS_1_11 b b b
Protection inhibited P49RMS_1_16 b b
Hot state P49RMS_1_18 b b
Inhibit thermal overload P49RMS_1_32 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
118 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Example
Consider a copper cable, 185 mm2, with a permissible current Ia = 485 A and a
DE50840
SEPED303001EN 119
Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
3 1.10
1.15
1.20
2.4643 1.8343
2.5060
1.4890
1.8734
2.5459
1.2587
1.5258
1.9110
1.25 2.5844
Iph/Ib 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40
Ia/Ib
0.50 0.1475 0.1365 0.1266 0.1178 0.1099 0.1028 0.0963 0.0905 0.0852 0.0803 0.0759 0.0718 0.0680 0.0645 0.0530 0.0444
0.55 0.1815 0.1676 0.1553 0.1444 0.1346 0.1258 0.1178 0.1106 0.1040 0.0980 0.0925 0.0875 0.0829 0.0786 0.0645 0.0539
0.60 0.2201 0.2029 0.1878 0.1744 0.1623 0.1516 0.1418 0.1330 0.1251 0.1178 0.1111 0.1051 0.0995 0.0943 0.0773 0.0645
0.65 0.2637 0.2428 0.2243 0.2080 0.1934 0.1804 0.1686 0.1581 0.1485 0.1397 0.1318 0.1245 0.1178 0.1116 0.0913 0.0762
0.70 0.3132 0.2877 0.2653 0.2456 0.2281 0.2125 0.1984 0.1858 0.1744 0.1640 0.1545 0.1459 0.1380 0.1307 0.1067 0.0889
0.75 0.3691 0.3383 0.3113 0.2877 0.2667 0.2481 0.2314 0.2165 0.2029 0.1907 0.1796 0.1694 0.1601 0.1516 0.1236 0.1028
0.80 0.4326 0.3953 0.3630 0.3347 0.3098 0.2877 0.2680 0.2503 0.2344 0.2201 0.2070 0.1952 0.1843 0.1744 0.1418 0.1178
0.85 0.5049 0.4599 0.4210 0.3873 0.3577 0.3316 0.3084 0.2877 0.2691 0.2523 0.2371 0.2233 0.2107 0.1992 0.1617 0.1340
0.90 0.5878 0.5332 0.4866 0.4463 0.4112 0.3804 0.3531 0.3289 0.3072 0.2877 0.2701 0.2541 0.2396 0.2263 0.1832 0.1516
0.95 0.6836 0.6170 0.5608 0.5127 0.4710 0.4347 0.4027 0.3744 0.3491 0.3265 0.3061 0.2877 0.2710 0.2557 0.2064 0.1704
1.00 0.7956 0.7138 0.6456 0.5878 0.5383 0.4953 0.4578 0.4247 0.3953 0.3691 0.3456 0.3244 0.3052 0.2877 0.2314 0.1907
1.05 0.9287 0.8267 0.7431 0.6733 0.6142 0.5633 0.5191 0.4804 0.4463 0.4159 0.3888 0.3644 0.3424 0.3225 0.2585 0.2125
1.10 1.0904 0.9606 0.8569 0.7717 0.7005 0.6399 0.5878 0.5425 0.5027 0.4675 0.4363 0.4082 0.3830 0.3603 0.2877 0.2358
1.15 1.2934 1.1231 0.9916 0.8862 0.7996 0.7269 0.6651 0.6118 0.5654 0.5246 0.4884 0.4563 0.4274 0.4014 0.3192 0.2609
1.20 1.5612 1.3269 1.1549 1.0217 0.9147 0.8267 0.7527 0.6897 0.6353 0.5878 0.5460 0.5090 0.4759 0.4463 0.3531 0.2877
1.25 1.9473 1.5955 1.3593 1.1856 1.0509 0.9425 0.8531 0.7780 0.7138 0.6583 0.6098 0.5671 0.5292 0.4953 0.3898 0.3165
1.30 2.6214 1.9823 1.6286 1.3907 1.2155 1.0793 0.9696 0.8789 0.8026 0.7373 0.6808 0.6314 0.5878 0.5491 0.4295 0.3473
1.35 2.6571 2.0161 1.6607 1.4212 1.2445 1.1069 0.9959 0.9041 0.8267 0.7604 0.7029 0.6526 0.6081 0.4725 0.3804
1.40 2.6915 2.0488 1.6918 1.4508 1.2727 1.1338 1.0217 0.9287 0.8502 0.7829 0.7245 0.6733 0.5191 0.4159
1.45 2.7249 2.0805 1.7220 1.4796 1.3001 1.1601 1.0467 0.9527 0.8733 0.8050 0.7458 0.5699 0.4542
1.50 2.7571 2.1112 1.7513 1.5075 1.3269 1.1856 1.0712 0.9762 0.8958 0.8267 0.6253 0.4953
1.55 2.7883 2.1410 1.7797 1.5347 1.3529 1.2106 1.0952 0.9992 0.9179 0.6859 0.5397
1.60 2.8186 2.1699 1.8074 1.5612 1.3783 1.2349 1.1185 1.0217 0.7527 0.5878
1.65 2.8480 2.1980 1.8343 1.5870 1.4031 1.2587 1.1414 0.8267 0.6399
1.70 2.8766 2.2254 1.8605 1.6122 1.4272 1.2819 0.9091 0.6966
120 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
Iph/Ib 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Ia/Ib
0.50 0.0051 0.0045 0.0039 0.0035 0.0031 0.0028 0.0025 0.0016 0.0011 0.0008 0.0006
0.55 0.0062 0.0054 0.0047 0.0042 0.0037 0.0034 0.0030 0.0019 0.0013 0.0010 0.0008
0.60 0.0074 0.0064 0.0056 0.0050 0.0045 0.0040 0.0036 0.0023 0.0016 0.0012 0.0009
0.65 0.0087 0.0075 0.0066 0.0059 0.0052 0.0047 0.0042 0.0027 0.0019 0.0014 0.0011
0.70 0.0101 0.0087 0.0077 0.0068 0.0061 0.0054 0.0049 0.0031 0.0022 0.0016 0.0012
0.75 0.0115 0.0101 0.0088 0.0078 0.0070 0.0063 0.0056 0.0036 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
0.80 0.0131 0.0114 0.0101 0.0089 0.0079 0.0071 0.0064 0.0041 0.0028 0.0021 0.0016
0.85 0.0149 0.0129 0.0114 0.0101 0.0090 0.0080 0.0073 0.0046 0.0032 0.0024 0.0018
0.90 0.0167 0.0145 0.0127 0.0113 0.0101 0.0090 0.0081 0.0052 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
0.95 0.0186 0.0162 0.0142 0.0126 0.0112 0.0101 0.0091 0.0058 0.0040 0.0030 0.0023
1.00 0.0206 0.0179 0.0157 0.0139 0.0124 0.0111 0.0101 0.0064 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025
1.05 0.0228 0.0198 0.0174 0.0154 0.0137 0.0123 0.0111 0.0071 0.0049 0.0036 0.0028
1.10 0.0250 0.0217 0.0191 0.0169 0.0151 0.0135 0.0122 0.0078 0.0054 0.0040 0.0030
1.15 0.0274 0.0238 0.0209 0.0185 0.0165 0.0148 0.0133 0.0085 0.0059 0.0043 0.0033
1.20 0.0298 0.0259 0.0228 0.0201 0.0179 0.0161 0.0145 0.0093 0.0064 0.0047 0.0036
1.25 0.0324 0.0282 0.0247 0.0219 0.0195 0.0175 0.0157 0.0101 0.0070 0.0051 0.0039
1.30 0.0351 0.0305 0.0268 0.0237 0.0211 0.0189 0.0170 0.0109 0.0075 0.0055 0.0042
1.35 0.0379 0.0329 0.0289 0.0255 0.0228 0.0204 0.0184 0.0117 0.0081 0.0060 0.0046
1.40 0.0408 0.0355 0.0311 0.0275 0.0245 0.0220 0.0198 0.0126 0.0087 0.0064 0.0049
1.45 0.0439 0.0381 0.0334 0.0295 0.0263 0.0236 0.0212 0.0135 0.0094 0.0069 0.0053
1.50 0.0470 0.0408 0.0358 0.0316 0.0282 0.0252 0.0228 0.0145 0.0101 0.0074 0.0056
1.55 0.0503 0.0437 0.0383 0.0338 0.0301 0.0270 0.0243 0.0155 0.0107 0.0079 0.0060
1.60 0.0537 0.0466 0.0408 0.0361 0.0321 0.0288 0.0259 0.0165 0.0114 0.0084 0.0064
1.65 0.0572 0.0496 0.0435 0.0384 0.0342 0.0306 0.0276 0.0176 0.0122 0.0089 0.0068
1.70 0.0608 0.0527 0.0462 0.0408 0.0363 0.0325 0.0293 0.0187 0.0129 0.0095 0.0073
SEPED303001EN 121
Protection functions Thermal overload for cables
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
Iph/Ib 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60 4.80
Ia/Ib
1.10 0.0779 0.0726 0.0562 0.0451 0.0371 0.0312 0.0266 0.0230 0.0201 0.0177 0.0157 0.0141 0.0127 0.0115 0.0105 0.0096
1.15 0.1223 0.1137 0.0877 0.0702 0.0576 0.0483 0.0411 0.0355 0.0310 0.0273 0.0243 0.0217 0.0196 0.0177 0.0161 0.0147
1.20 0.1708 0.1586 0.1217 0.0970 0.0795 0.0665 0.0566 0.0488 0.0426 0.0375 0.0333 0.0298 0.0268 0.0243 0.0221 0.0202
1.25 0.2240 0.2076 0.1584 0.1258 0.1028 0.0858 0.0729 0.0628 0.0547 0.0482 0.0428 0.0382 0.0344 0.0311 0.0283 0.0259
1.30 0.2826 0.2614 0.1981 0.1566 0.1276 0.1063 0.0902 0.0776 0.0676 0.0594 0.0527 0.0471 0.0424 0.0383 0.0348 0.0318
1.35 0.3474 0.3204 0.2410 0.1897 0.1541 0.1281 0.1085 0.0932 0.0811 0.0713 0.0632 0.0564 0.0507 0.0458 0.0417 0.0380
1.40 0.4194 0.3857 0.2877 0.2253 0.1823 0.1512 0.1278 0.1097 0.0953 0.0837 0.0741 0.0661 0.0594 0.0537 0.0488 0.0445
1.45 0.4999 0.4581 0.3384 0.2635 0.2125 0.1758 0.1483 0.1271 0.1103 0.0967 0.0856 0.0763 0.0686 0.0619 0.0562 0.0513
1.50 0.5907 0.5390 0.3938 0.3046 0.2446 0.2018 0.1699 0.1454 0.1260 0.1104 0.0976 0.0870 0.0781 0.0705 0.0640 0.0584
1.55 0.6940 0.6302 0.4545 0.3491 0.2790 0.2295 0.1928 0.1646 0.1425 0.1247 0.1102 0.0982 0.0881 0.0795 0.0721 0.0657
1.60 0.8134 0.7340 0.5213 0.3971 0.3159 0.2589 0.2169 0.1849 0.1599 0.1398 0.1234 0.1098 0.0984 0.0888 0.0805 0.0734
1.65 0.9536 0.8537 0.5952 0.4492 0.3553 0.2901 0.2425 0.2063 0.1781 0.1555 0.1372 0.1220 0.1093 0.0985 0.0893 0.0814
1.70 1.1221 0.9943 0.6776 0.5059 0.3977 0.3234 0.2695 0.2288 0.1972 0.1720 0.1516 0.1347 0.1206 0.1086 0.0984 0.0897
Iph/Ib 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Ia/Ib
1.10 0.0088 0.0072 0.0060 0.0051 0.0044 0.0038 0.0033 0.0030 0.0026 0.0024 0.0021 0.0014 0.0009 0.0007 0.0005
1.15 0.0135 0.0111 0.0093 0.0078 0.0067 0.0059 0.0051 0.0045 0.0040 0.0036 0.0033 0.0021 0.0014 0.0011 0.0008
1.20 0.0185 0.0152 0.0127 0.0107 0.0092 0.0080 0.0070 0.0062 0.0055 0.0049 0.0045 0.0028 0.0020 0.0014 0.0011
1.25 0.0237 0.0194 0.0162 0.0137 0.0118 0.0102 0.0090 0.0079 0.0071 0.0063 0.0057 0.0036 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
1.30 0.0292 0.0239 0.0199 0.0169 0.0145 0.0126 0.0110 0.0097 0.0087 0.0078 0.0070 0.0045 0.0031 0.0023 0.0017
1.35 0.0349 0.0285 0.0238 0.0201 0.0173 0.0150 0.0131 0.0116 0.0103 0.0093 0.0083 0.0053 0.0037 0.0027 0.0021
1.40 0.0408 0.0334 0.0278 0.0235 0.0202 0.0175 0.0154 0.0136 0.0121 0.0108 0.0097 0.0062 0.0043 0.0031 0.0024
1.45 0.0470 0.0384 0.0320 0.0271 0.0232 0.0202 0.0177 0.0156 0.0139 0.0124 0.0112 0.0071 0.0049 0.0036 0.0028
1.50 0.0535 0.0437 0.0364 0.0308 0.0264 0.0229 0.0200 0.0177 0.0157 0.0141 0.0127 0.0081 0.0056 0.0041 0.0031
1.55 0.0602 0.0491 0.0409 0.0346 0.0297 0.0257 0.0225 0.0199 0.0177 0.0158 0.0143 0.0091 0.0063 0.0046 0.0035
1.60 0.0672 0.0548 0.0456 0.0386 0.0330 0.0286 0.0251 0.0221 0.0197 0.0176 0.0159 0.0101 0.0070 0.0051 0.0039
1.65 0.0745 0.0607 0.0505 0.0427 0.0365 0.0317 0.0277 0.0245 0.0218 0.0195 0.0176 0.0112 0.0077 0.0057 0.0043
1.70 0.0820 0.0668 0.0555 0.0469 0.0402 0.0348 0.0305 0.0269 0.0239 0.0214 0.0193 0.0122 0.0085 0.0062 0.0047
122 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3-phase current which
100
takes into account harmonics up to number 13.
The highest current of the three phases I1, I2 and I3, subsequently called phase
10-1 current Iph, is used to calculate the heat rise:
Iph = max ( I1 ,I2 ,I3 )
10-2
The rated current of step x (Ibgx) is equal to the fraction of current that the step
represents in relation to the rated current of the capacitor bank (Ib).
Kgx
3
Ibgx = --------------------------- Ib
n
∑ Kgx
x=1
where Ib is the rated current of the capacitor bank
x is the step number
n is the total number of steps, between 2 and 4
Kgx is the capacitor step ratio value of step x
The rated current of the sequence of steps (Ibseq) is calculated. It is the sum of the
rated currents (Ibgx) of the steps closed during the sequence.
n
Ibseq = ∑ p ( x )Ibgx
x=1
where x is the step number
n is the total number of steps, between 2 and 4
p(x) is the position of the step x:
b p(x) = 1 when the step switch x is closed
b p(x) = 0 when the step switch x is open.
The heat rise is proportional to the square of the drawn current in relation to the rated
current of the sequence. Under steady state conditions, it is equal to:
E = ⎛ -----------------⎞ × 100
Iph 2 as a %
⎝ Ibseq⎠
If the closed positions of the steps are not acquired or if the number of steps set in the
particular characteristics is 1, the rated current of the sequences is equal to the rated
current of the capacitor bank. In such cases, the heat rise is proportional to the drawn
current in relation to the rated current of the capacitor bank. Under steady state
conditions, it is equal to:
Iph 2
E = ⎛ ---------⎞ × 100 as a %
⎝ Ib ⎠
SEPED303001EN 123
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
Operation curve
The protection function gives a tripping order when the current drawn is greater than
the overload current, with respect to the rated current of the sequence.
The tripping time is set by assigning a hot tripping time to a setting current. This
setting is used to calculate a time factor:
1
C = ------------------------------------------------
⎛ ⎛ -----⎞2 – 1 ⎞
Is
⎜ ⎝ Ib⎠ ⎟ where In: natural logarithm.
In ⎜ ------------------------------------ ⎟
⎜ ⎛ -----⎞ – ⎛ -------------⎞ ⎟
Is 2 Itrip 2
⎝ ⎝ Ib⎠ ⎝ Ib ⎠ ⎠
The tripping time with an initial heat rise of 0 % is then given by:
⎛ ⎛ ----------------
Iph ⎞2
- ⎞
⎜ ⎝ Ibseq⎠ ⎟
t = C × In ⎜ -------------------------------------------------------- ⎟ × Ts where In: natural logarithm.
⎜ ⎛ ----------------
Iph ⎞2 ⎛ Itrip ⎞2 ⎟
⎝ ⎝ Ibseq-⎠ – ⎝ ---------------- -
3 = k x Ts
Ibseq⎠ ⎠
The tripping time with an intial heat rise of 100 % is then given by:
⎛ Iph ⎞2
⎛ ---------------- ⎞
- –1
⎜ ⎝ Ibseq⎠ ⎟
t = C × In ⎜ -------------------------------------------------------- ⎟ × Ts where In: natural logarithm.
⎜ ⎛ ----------------
Iph ⎞2 ⎛ Itrip ⎞2 ⎟
⎝ ⎝ Ibseq-⎠ – ⎝ ---------------- Ibseq⎠ ⎠
-
= k x Ts
The tripping curve tables give the values of k for an inital heat rise from 0 % to 100 %.
The current heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
Block diagram
DE80269
124 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
User information
The following information is available for the user:
b heat rise
b time before tripping (with constant current).
Characteristics
Settings
Alarm current Ialarm
Setting range 1.05 to 1.70 Ib
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1A
Tripping current Itrip
Setting range 1.05 to 1.70 Ib
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1A
Setting current Is
Setting range
Accuracy (1)
Resolution
1.02 Itrip to 2 Ib
±2 %
1A
3
Setting time Ts
Setting range 1 to 2000 minutes (range varies depending on the tripping and
setting currents)
Resolution 1 min
Characteristic times
Operation time accuracy ±2 % or ±2 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P49RMS_1_101 b b
Protection inhibition P49RMS_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Delayed output P49RMS _1_3 b b b
Alarm P49RMS _1_10 b b b
Inhibit closing P49RMS _1_11 b b b
Protection inhibited P49RMS _1_16 b b
Hot state P49RMS _1_18 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 125
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
Example
Given a 350 kvar capacitor bank with 3 steps, and no anti-harmonic inductors, for a
PE50424
According to the manufacturer data, this capacitor bank can operate continuously with
an overload current of 120 % Ib and for 20 minutes with an overload of 140 % Ib.
For a current of 125 % Ibseq = 76 A, and an initial heat rise of 100 %, the value of k
in the tripping curve tables is: k = 2.486.
For a current of 140 % Ibseq = 141 A, and an initial heat rise of 0 %, the value of k in
the tripping curve tables is: k = 2.164.
The table below summarizes the rated sequence current, the tripping current and
examples of tripping times for overload currents of 125 % Ib and 140 % Ib, for initial
heat rises of 0 % and 100 %.
126 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
Is = 1.2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 1.4660 1.3741 1.2911 1.2158 0.9747 0.8011 0.6713 0.5714 0.4927 0.4295 0.3779 0.3352 0.2995 0.2692
1.10 0.6725 0.6293 0.5905 0.5554 0.4435 0.3635 0.3040 0.2584 0.2226 0.1939 0.1704 0.1511 0.1349 0.1212
1.15 0.3699 0.3456 0.3237 0.3040 0.2417 0.1976 0.1649 0.1399 0.1204 0.1047 0.0920 0.0815 0.0728 0.0653
3
Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 15.0540 11.1530 9.0217 7.6039 6.5703 5.7750 5.1405 4.6210 4.1871 3.8189 3.5027 3.2281 2.9875 2.7752 2.5864
1.10 6.7905 5.0545 4.1030 3.4684 3.0047 2.6470 2.3611 2.1265 1.9301 1.7633 1.6197 1.4948 1.3852 1.2883
1.15 3.9779 2.9738 2.4220 2.0530 1.7829 1.5740 1.4067 1.2692 1.1539 1.0557 0.9711 0.8974 0.8327
1.20 2.5077 1.8824 1.5378 1.3070 1.1375 1.0063 0.9010 0.8143 0.7415 0.6794 0.6257 0.5790
1.25 1.5305 1.1532 0.9449 0.8050 0.7021 0.6223 0.5582 0.5052 0.4607 0.4227 0.3898
Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 2.4177 2.2661 2.1292 2.0051 1.6074 1.3211 1.1071 0.9424 0.8126 0.7084 0.6233 0.5529 0.4939 0.4440
1.10 1.2021 1.1249 1.0555 0.9927 0.7927 0.6498 0.5435 0.4619 0.3979 0.3465 0.3047 0.2701 0.2412 0.2167
1.15 0.7753 0.7242 0.6785 0.6372 0.5066 0.4141 0.3456 0.2933 0.2523 0.2195 0.1929 0.1709 0.1525 0.1370
1.20 0.5378 0.5013 0.4688 0.4396 0.3478 0.2834 0.2360 0.1999 0.1717 0.1493 0.1310 0.1160 0.1035 0.0929
1.25 0.3611 0.3358 0.3134 0.2933 0.2309 0.1874 0.1557 0.1316 0.1129 0.0981 0.0860 0.0761 0.0678 0.0609
Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 21.4400 15.8850 12.8490 10.8300 9.3578 8.2251 7.3214 6.5815 5.9634 5.4391 4.9887 4.5976 4.2550 3.9525 3.6837
1.10 9.9827 7.4306 6.0317 5.0988 4.4171 3.8914 3.4710 3.1261 2.8375 2.5922 2.3811 2.1975 2.0364 1.8939
1.15 6.1214 4.5762 3.7270 3.1593 2.7435 2.4222 2.1647 1.9531 1.7757 1.6246 1.4944 1.3810 1.2813
1.20 4.1525 3.1170 2.5464 2.1642 1.8836 1.6664 1.4920 1.3483 1.2278 1.1249 1.0361 0.9587
1.25 2.9310 2.2085 1.8095 1.5416 1.3446 1.1918 1.0689 0.9676 0.8823 0.8095 0.7466
1.30 2.0665 1.5627 1.2839 1.0964 0.9582 0.8508 0.7643 0.6929 0.6327 0.5813
1.35 1.3673 1.0375 0.8546 0.7314 0.6404 0.5696 0.5125 0.4653 0.4254
Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 3.4434 3.2275 3.0325 2.8557 2.2894 1.8816 1.5768 1.3422 1.1573 1.0089 0.8877 0.7874 0.7034 0.6323
1.10 1.7672 1.6537 1.5516 1.4593 1.1654 0.9552 0.7989 0.6791 0.5849 0.5094 0.4479 0.3970 0.3545 0.3186
1.15 1.1931 1.1145 1.0440 0.9805 0.7796 0.6372 0.5318 0.4513 0.3882 0.3378 0.2968 0.2629 0.2346 0.2107
1.20 0.8906 0.8302 0.7763 0.7279 0.5760 0.4692 0.3907 0.3310 0.2844 0.2472 0.2170 0.1921 0.1714 0.1538
1.25 0.6916 0.6432 0.6002 0.5618 0.4421 0.3589 0.2981 0.2521 0.2163 0.1878 0.1647 0.1457 0.1299 0.1165
1.30 0.5367 0.4977 0.4634 0.4328 0.3386 0.2738 0.2268 0.1914 0.1640 0.1422 0.1246 0.1102 0.0981 0.0880
1.35 0.3913 0.3617 0.3358 0.3129 0.2431 0.1957 0.1617 0.1361 0.1164 0.1009 0.0883 0.0780 0.0694 0.0622
SEPED303001EN 127
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
3 Is = 2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 11.1840 10.4830 9.8495 9.2753 7.4358 6.1115 5.1214 4.3594 3.7590 3.2768 2.8832 2.5574 2.2846 2.0537
1.10 6.0114 5.6254 5.2781 4.9642 3.9642 3.2494 2.7177 2.3099 1.9896 1.7328 1.5235 1.3506 1.2059 1.0836
1.15 4.2947 4.0117 3.7581 3.5295 2.8064 2.2936 1.9142 1.6245 1.3975 1.2159 1.0683 0.9464 0.8446 0.7586
1.20 3.4426 3.2091 3.0008 2.8138 2.2265 1.8138 1.5104 1.2795 1.0993 0.9555 0.8388 0.7426 0.6624 0.5946
1.25 2.9368 2.7311 2.5486 2.3855 1.8775 1.5240 1.2659 1.0704 0.9184 0.7974 0.6994 0.6187 0.5515 0.4949
1.30 2.6048 2.4157 2.2489 2.1007 1.6433 1.3288 1.1007 0.9289 0.7958 0.6901 0.6047 0.5346 0.4762 0.4271
1.35 2.3729 2.1935 2.0365 1.8978 1.4745 1.1871 0.9804 0.8257 0.7061 0.6116 0.5354 0.4730 0.4210 0.3774
1.40 2.2046 2.0301 1.8787 1.7459 1.3461 1.0785 0.8878 0.7459 0.6369 0.5509 0.4817 0.4252 0.3782 0.3388
1.50 1.9875 1.8112 1.6620 1.5337 1.1600 0.9190 0.7509 0.6276 0.5337 0.4603 0.4016 0.3538 0.3143 0.2812
1.60 1.8779 1.6825 1.5240 1.3920 1.0256 0.8008 0.6484 0.5386 0.4560 0.3920 0.3411 0.2998 0.2659 0.2376
1.70 1.8713 1.6215 1.4355 1.2893 0.9143 0.7007 0.5610 0.4625 0.3895 0.3335 0.2894 0.2538 0.2246 0.2004
128 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
Is = 1.2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 0.1630 0.1511 0.1405 0.1311 0.1020 0.0821 0.0677 0.0569 0.0486 0.0421 0.0368 0.0325 0.0289 0.0259
1.10 0.1398 0.1293 0.1201 0.1119 0.0867 0.0696 0.0573 0.0481 0.0410 0.0354 0.0310 0.0273 0.0243 0.0217
1.15 0.1082 0.0999 0.0926 0.0861 0.0664 0.0531 0.0436 0.0366 0.0312 0.0269 0.0235 0.0207 0.0184 0.0165
3
Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 4.1639 2.3784 1.6492 1.2509 1.0000 0.8276 0.7021 0.6068 0.5320 0.4719 0.4226 0.3815 0.3467 0.3170 0.2913
1.10 2.9020 1.7875 1.2878 1.0000 0.8123 0.6802 0.5823 0.5068 0.4470 0.3984 0.3583 0.3246 0.2959 0.2713
1.15 2.0959 1.3521 1.0000 0.7901 0.6498 0.5493 0.4737 0.4148 0.3676 0.3291 0.2970 0.2699 0.2468
1.20 1.5014 1.0000 0.7541 0.6039 0.5017 0.4274 0.3708 0.3264 0.2905 0.2610 0.2364 0.2154
1.25 1.0000 0.6820 0.5222 0.4227 0.3541 0.3036 0.2648 0.2341 0.2092 0.1886 0.1713
Is = 1.3 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 0.2688 0.2491 0.2317 0.2162 0.1682 0.1354 0.1117 0.0939 0.0802 0.0694 0.0607 0.0535 0.0476 0.0426
1.10 0.2499 0.2311 0.2146 0.2000 0.1550 0.1243 0.1023 0.0859 0.0733 0.0633 0.0554 0.0488 0.0434 0.0389
1.15 0.2268 0.2094 0.1941 0.1805 0.1393 0.1114 0.0915 0.0767 0.0653 0.0564 0.0492 0.0434 0.0386 0.0345
1.20 0.1974 0.1819 0.1682 0.1562 0.1199 0.0955 0.0783 0.0655 0.0557 0.0481 0.0419 0.0369 0.0328 0.0293
1.25 0.1565 0.1438 0.1327 0.1230 0.0938 0.0745 0.0609 0.0508 0.0432 0.0372 0.0324 0.0285 0.0253 0.0226
Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 5.9304 3.3874 2.3488 1.7816 1.4243 1.1788 1.0000 0.8642 0.7577 0.6721 0.6019 0.5434 0.4938 0.4515 0.4148
1.10 4.2662 2.6278 1.8931 1.4701 1.1942 1.0000 0.8560 0.7451 0.6571 0.5857 0.5267 0.4771 0.4350 0.3988
1.15 3.2252 2.0806 1.5388 1.2158 1.0000 0.8453 0.7289 0.6383 0.5657 0.5064 0.4570 0.4154 0.3797
1.20 2.4862 1.6559 1.2488 1.0000 0.8307 0.7077 0.6141 0.5405 0.4811 0.4323 0.3914 0.3567
1.25 1.9151 1.3061 1.0000 0.8095 0.6780 0.5814 0.5072 0.4484 0.4007 0.3612 0.3280
1.30 1.4393 1.0000 0.7750 0.6330 0.5339 0.4603 0.4035 0.3581 0.3211 0.2903
1.35 1.0000 0.7053 0.5521 0.4544 0.3855 0.3340 0.2940 0.2618 0.2355
Is = 1.4 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 0.3829 0.3548 0.3300 0.3079 0.2396 0.1928 0.1590 0.1337 0.1142 0.0988 0.0864 0.0762 0.0678 0.0607
1.10 0.3673 0.3398 0.3155 0.2940 0.2278 0.1828 0.1505 0.1263 0.1078 0.0931 0.0814 0.0718 0.0638 0.0571
1.15 0.3490 0.3222 0.2986 0.2778 0.2143 0.1714 0.1408 0.1180 0.1005 0.0868 0.0758 0.0668 0.0593 0.0531
1.20 0.3269 0.3011 0.2786 0.2587 0.1985 0.1582 0.1296 0.1085 0.0923 0.0796 0.0694 0.0611 0.0543 0.0486
1.25 0.2997 0.2753 0.2541 0.2355 0.1796 0.1426 0.1165 0.0973 0.0827 0.0712 0.0621 0.0546 0.0485 0.0433
1.30 0.2643 0.2420 0.2228 0.2060 0.1561 0.1235 0.1006 0.0838 0.0711 0.0612 0.0533 0.0468 0.0415 0.0371
1.35 0.2135 0.1948 0.1788 0.1649 0.1240 0.0976 0.0793 0.0659 0.0558 0.0480 0.0417 0.0367 0.0325 0.0290
SEPED303001EN 129
Protection functions Thermal overload for capacitors
ANSI code 49RMS
3 Is = 2 Ib
Iph/Ibseq 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00
Itrip/Ibseq
1.05 1.2436 1.1525 1.0718 1.0000 0.7783 0.6262 0.5165 0.4343 0.3709 0.3209 0.2806 0.2476 0.2202 0.1972
1.10 1.2495 1.1559 1.0733 1.0000 0.7750 0.6217 0.5118 0.4297 0.3666 0.3168 0.2768 0.2441 0.2170 0.1943
1.15 1.2562 1.1597 1.0750 1.0000 0.7713 0.6169 0.5066 0.4247 0.3618 0.3124 0.2727 0.2404 0.2136 0.1911
1.20 1.2638 1.1640 1.0768 1.0000 0.7673 0.6115 0.5010 0.4192 0.3567 0.3076 0.2683 0.2363 0.2099 0.1877
1.25 1.2725 1.1690 1.0790 1.0000 0.7628 0.6057 0.4949 0.4133 0.3511 0.3025 0.2636 0.2320 0.2059 0.1841
1.30 1.2826 1.1747 1.0814 1.0000 0.7578 0.5992 0.4882 0.4069 0.3451 0.2969 0.2585 0.2274 0.2017 0.1802
1.35 1.2945 1.1813 1.0842 1.0000 0.7522 0.5920 0.4808 0.3998 0.3386 0.2910 0.2531 0.2224 0.1971 0.1760
1.40 1.3085 1.1891 1.0874 1.0000 0.7459 0.5841 0.4728 0.3921 0.3315 0.2844 0.2471 0.2170 0.1922 0.1715
1.50 1.3463 1.2094 1.0958 1.0000 0.7306 0.5652 0.4539 0.3744 0.3152 0.2697 0.2337 0.2048 0.1811 0.1614
1.60 1.4070 1.2406 1.1082 1.0000 0.7102 0.5410 0.4303 0.3527 0.2955 0.2520 0.2178 0.1904 0.1681 0.1496
1.70 1.5237 1.2953 1.1286 1.0000 0.6816 0.5089 0.4000 0.3253 0.2711 0.2302 0.1983 0.1730 0.1524 0.1355
130 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS
Operation
This function is used to protect a transformer against overloads, based on the
measurement of the current taken.
IEC standard 60076-2 proposes 2 thermal models for evaluating the winding thermal
capacity used during an overload, depending on whether the transformer is dry-type
or immersed.
Taking account of harmonics
The equivalent current Ieq measured by the transformer thermal overload protection
is the highest of the phase rms currents (the rms current takes account of harmonic
numbers up to 13).
Taking account of 2 operating conditions
The choice between thermal sets 1 and 2 is made by the "switching of thermal
settings" logic input. This means you can have thermal set 1 for normal transformer
operation and thermal set 2 for unusual transformer operation.
Dry-type transformer
For dry-type transformers, the thermal model used in the Sepam relay conforms to
standard IEC 60076-12 (with 1 time constant).
3
Block diagram
Insulation class Switching Insulation
AN / AF class
DE81253
of thermal
settings
I1 rms
Ieq Dry-type transformer
+ Alarm
I2 rms Max θ > θ alarm
thermal model δθ
I3 rms +
Trip
θ > θ trip
Ambient θ sensor
θa
20 rC
Inhibition by
logic input or TC
Use of
temperature
sensor
SEPED303001EN 131
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS
The protection trips when the temperature build-up δθ in the winding reaches
θ max – θ .
a
The time constant is evaluated, for each winding, according to standard IEC 60076-
12 as follows:
C ⋅ ( Δθ n – θ e )
τ = ------------------------------------
-
Pr
Where:
Pr : total winding loss in Watts
C : winding thermal capacity in Watts min, given by the winding material:
b Aluminum: 15 times weight of Al conductor (kg) + 24.5 times weight of epoxy and
other insulating component (kg)
b Copper: 6.42 times weight of Cu conductor (kg) + 24.5 times weight of epoxy and
other insulating component (kg)
θ e : contribution of the core to the thermal capacity used:
b 5 °C (41 °F) for MV winding
b 25 °C (77 °F) for LV winding
132 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS
80
DE81254
70
10
0 3
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Operating information
The following information is available to the operator: θk – θ a
b the winding relative thermal capacity used E as a %: E k = 100 ⋅ ------------------
Δθ n
b the time before tripping in minutes (at constant current)
SEPED303001EN 133
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I1, I2, I3 / I'1, I'2, I'3
Choice of transformer or thermal model
Setting range Dry-type transformer
Natural ventilation (AN)
Forced ventilation (AF)
Generic model(1)
Insulation class
Setting range 105 (A)
120 (E)
130 (B)
155 (F)
180 (H)
200
3
220
Alarm set point ( θ alarm)
Setting range class 105: 95 °C to 130 °C (203 °F to 266 °F)
class 120: 110 °C to 145 °C (230 °F to 293 °F)
class 130: 120 °C to 155 °C (248 °F to 311 °F)
class 155: 145 °C to 180 °C (293 °F to 356 °F)
class 180: 170 °C to 205 °C (338 °F to 401 °F)
class 200: 190 °C to 225 °C (374 °F to 437 °F)
class 220: 210 °C to 245 °C (410 °F to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Tripping set point ( θ trip)
Setting range class 105: 95 °C to 130 °C (203 °F to 266 °F)
class 120: 110 °C to 145 °C (230 °F to 293 °F)
class 130: 120 °C to 155 °C (248 °F to 311 °F)
class 155: 145 °C to 180 °C (293 °F to 356 °F)
class 180: 170 °C to 205 °C (338 °F to 401 °F)
class 200: 190 °C to 225 °C (374 °F to 437 °F)
class 220: 210 °C to 245 °C (410 °F to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Transformer time constant ( τ )
Setting range 1 min to 600 min
Resolution 1 min
Accounting for ambient temperature
Setting range yes / no
Characteristic times
Operating time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Reset protection P49RMS_1_101
Inhibit protection P49RMS_1_113
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Time-delayed output P49RMS _1_3
Alarm P49RMS _1_10
Inhibit closing P49RMS _1_11
Protection inhibited P49RMS _1_16
Hot state P49RMS _1_18
Thermal overload inhibited P49RMS_1_32
Zero speed P49RMS_1_38
(1) See settings associated with generic thermal overload.
134 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
Code ANSI 49RMS
Immersed transformer
For immersed transformers, the thermal model used in the Sepam relay conforms to
standard IEC 60076-7 (with 2 time constants).
The thermal limit for immersed transformers is determined by the thermal limit for the
oil, to avoid the formation of bubbles that could damage the dielectric strength of the
oil.
Block diagram
Transformer
restricted τwdg τoil type
Change of
DE81255
thermal
settings
I1 rms
Ieq
+ Alarm
I2 rms Max Winding thermal model θ > θ alarm
δθ wdg +
I3 rms
θ oil
θ > θ trip
Trip 3
20°C Oil thermal model
Use of
temperature Inhibition by
sensor logic input or TC
θ ambient
θ oil
Ieq
∆ θ wdg
Ib 1+ p
k22
SEPED303001EN 135
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS
When the winding and oil time constants are given by the immersed transformer
manufacturer, the user can enter them in place of the default values proposed by the
standard.
For transformers in which the oil flow can be restricted, exchanges between the
winding and the oil are worse, so the winding thermal capacity used values are
exceeded. In this case coefficient κ 21 takes the following values:
3 Transformer Restricted flow
OFF ON
ONAN (power) 2 3
ONAF 2 3
OF 1,3 1,45
x
Ieq
DE81257
1 δθ oil
∆ θho
1+R
136 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS
SEPED303001EN 137
Protection functions Thermal overload for transformers
ANSI code 49RMS
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I1, I2, I3 / I'1, I'2, I'3
Choice of transformer or thermal model
Setting range Immersed transformer
ONAN (distribution)
ONAN (power)
ONAF
OD
OF
Generic model(1)
Alarm set point ( θ alarm)
Setting range Immersed transfo: 98 °C to 160 °C (208 °F to 320 °F)
Dry-type transfo: 95 °C to 245 °C (203 °F to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Tripping set point ( θ trip)
3 Setting range Immersed transfo: 98 °C to 160 °C (208 °F to 320 °F)
Dry-type transfo: 95 °C to 245 °C (203 °F to 473 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1 °F)
Winding time constant ( τ enr )
Setting range 1 mn to 600 mn
Resolution 1 min
Oil time constant ( τ huile )
Setting range 5 mn to 600 mn
Resolution 1 min
Accounting for ambient temperature
Setting range yes / no
Accounting for oil temperature
Setting range yes / no
Restricted oil flow
Setting range on / off
Characteristic times
Operating time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Reset protection P49RMS_1_101 b b
Inhibit protection P49RMS_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Time-delayed output P49RMS _1_3 b b b
Alarm P49RMS _1_10 b b b
Inhibit closing P49RMS _1_11 b b b
Protection inhibited P49RMS _1_16 b b
Hot state P49RMS _1_18 b b
Thermal overload inhibited P49RMS_1_32 b b
Zero speed P49RMS_1_38 b b
(1) See settings associated with generic thermal overload.
138 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Operation
This function is used to protect the stator and the rotor of an asynchronous motor.
Block diagram
The stator thermal overload protection is provided by a thermal model with 2 time
constants (τ long and τ short).
The rotor excessive starting time thermal protection is provided by an adiabatic
thermal model.
T max I alarm
DE81258
Alarm
Ambient Correction by the fcorr Annunciation
temperature Exfcorr > I alarm2
ambient temperature P49RMS_1_10
LRT
Stator thermal
capacity used
E
Exfcorr > I trip2
&
3
Is_therm
Id Id
Calculation Metal frame thermal M Tripping
Id > Is_therm ≥1
li of Ieq capacity used Annunciation
&
P49RMS_1_3
IL gn
W &
W>1
Rotor thermal
capacity used Inhibit
Closing
Annunciation
&
IL Start inhibit P49RMS_1_11
Tc
Th
g Zero rotor speed
“Inhibit thermal overload” TC g > 0.95
P49RMS_1_38
logic input “Inhibit thermal overload” ≥1 lnhibit thermal overload
P49RMS_1_32
“Authorize Hot state
emergency restart” logic input M > (Hot state set point)2
P49RMS_1_18
49 RMS
“on” Hot state set point
Protection inhibited
“Inhibit protection” ≥1
P49RMS_1_16
logic equation
P49RMS_1_113
SEPED303001EN 139
Protection functions Motor thermal overload
ANSI code 49RMS
Start inhibit
When the protection trips, circuit breaker closing is inhibited until the rotor thermal
capacity used allows another motor start.
This inhibit is grouped together with the "Starts per hour" protection function, and
signaled by the message "INHIBIT START".
The inhibit time before starting is authorized can be accessed from:
b the "Machine diagnosis" tab in the SFT2841 software
b the Sepam front panel.
Operating information
The following information can be accessed from the "Machine diagnosis" tab in the
SFT2841 software and the Sepam front panel:
b the stator thermal capacity used
b the time before the stator protection trips (at constant current)
b the time before restarting is authorized.
140 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Characteristics
Settings Inputs
Measurement origin Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Setting range I1, I2, I3 Reset protection P49RMS_1_101 b b
Choice of thermal model Inhibit protection P49RMS_1_113 b b
Setting range 2 Constant Outputs
Generic(1) Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Thermal model switching threshold Is_therm Time-delayed output P49RMS_1_3 b b b
Setting range 1 to 10 pu of Ib Alarm P49RMS_1_10 b b b
Resolution 0.1 pu of Ib Inhibit closing P49RMS_1_11 b b b
Stator thermal settings Protection inhibited P49RMS_1_16 b b
Motor thermal capacity used time constant τ long Hot state P49RMS_1_18 b b
Setting range 1 mn to 600 mn Thermal overload inhibited P49RMS_1_32 b b
Resolution 1 mn Zero speed P49RMS_1_38 b b
Stator thermal capacity used time constant τ short
Setting range 1 mn to 60 mn
Resolution
Cooling time constant
0,1 mn
τ cool
3
Setting range 5 mn to 600 mn
Resolution 1 mn
Tripping current set point Itrip
Setting range 50 % to 173 % of Ib
Resolution 1 % of Ib
Alarm current set point Ialarm
Setting range 50 % to 173 % of Ib
Resolution 1 % of Ib
Thermal exchange coefficient between the α
stator and the motor
Setting range 0 to 1
Resolution 0.01
Hot state set point
Setting range 0.5 to 1 pu of Ib
Resolution 0.01 pu of Ib
Accounting for ambient temperature
Setting range Yes / No
Maximum equipment temperature Tmax
(insulation class)
Setting range 70 °C to 250 °C or
158 °F to 482 °F
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F
Rotor thermal settings
Locked rotor amperes IL
Setting range 1 to 10 pu of Ib
Resolution 0.01 pu of Ib
Locked rotor torque LRT
Setting range 0.2 to 2 pu of Ib
Resolution 0.01 pu of Ib
Locked cold rotor limit time Tc
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Resolution 0.1 s
Locked hot rotor limit time Th
Setting range 1 s to 300 s
Resolution 0.1 s
Characteristic times
Operating time ±2 % or ±1 s
accuracy
(1) See settings associated with generic thermal overload.
SEPED303001EN 141
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
DE81197
2 Switching threshold between the stator and rotor
thermal models (Is_therm)
3 Rotor thermal model parameters 1
4 Stator thermal model parameters
5 Calculated stator thermal model parameters 4 2
5
3
3
SFT2841 software: 49RMS protection parameter-setting screen for a motor application.
Parameter-setting procedure
1. Select the thermal overload protection function by choosing the
"2 Time constants" value from the "Thermal Model" drop-down list.
Note: The "Generic" value selects the generic thermal overload protection function (see
page 153 to set the parameters for this protection function).
2. Enter the rotor and stator parameters using the motor manufacturer data.
b Rotor parameters:
v Locked cold rotor limit time (Tc)
v Locked hot rotor limit time (Th)
v Locked rotor torque (LRT)
v Starting current (IL)
b Stator parameters:
v Heating time constant: τ long
v Cooling time constant: τ cool
3. Determine in graphic form the switching threshold between the stator and rotor
thermal models (Is_therm).
Depending on the manufacturer curves, there are 2 possible scenarios:
b If there is any discontinuity between the manufacturer curves (see example on
next page), choose Is_therm at the stator breaking point.
b If there is no discontinuity:
v Plot the locked cold rotor thermal model curve, between IL and Ib, using the
equation below in order to determine Is_therm:
W(I) = Tc x (IL / I)2
v Determine the value of Is_therm for which the rotor thermal model (adiabatic) no
longer corresponds to the manufacturer's locked cold rotor curve.
142 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
10000
DE81259
Motor running
1000
Tc
100 Hot curve
Th
10
0 1 Itrip 2 3 4 5
IL
6
3
I/Ib
Stator Rotor
Is_therm
Determination of Is_therm in the case of discontinuous manufacturer curves.
If these parameters are not available, proceed as follows to calculate them using
the SFT2841 software:
4.1. Press the "Use Genetic Algorithm" button which can be accessed from the
49RMS tab in the protection functions.
4.2. Enter 4 typical points found on the manufacturer's cold stator curve.
4.3. Press the "Use Genetic Algorithm" button: the SFT2841 software calculates all
3 parameters.
SEPED303001EN 143
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
Code ANSI 49RMS
2. Set the rotor and stator model parameters using the manufacturer data:
10000
DE81260
6000
Cold curve
1500
1000
Ttrip in sec
400
250
Hot curve
100
10
1 1.4 1.8 2 2.4 2.8 3 4 5 6
l/lb
144 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
I/Ib Ttrip
1.4 6000 s
1.8 1500 s
2.4 400 s
2.8 250 s
The SFT2841 software calculates the missing stator parameters on the basis of
these 4 points:
1000
Ttrip in sec
100
10
1 2 3 4 5 6
l/lb
Stator Rotor
Is_therm
Comparison of the manufacturer curves and the configured model.
SEPED303001EN 145
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
2. Set the rotor and stator parameters using the manufacturer data:
1000
Ttrip in sec
100
10
1 2 3 4 5 6
Is_therm l/lb
In this example the rotor and stator manufacturer curves (in bold lines) merge into
one another.
We therefore plot the rotor model curves (in fine lines) defined by:
b cold curve
2
W ( I ) = 33,5 ⋅ ( 6 ⁄ I )
b hot curve
2
W ( I ) = 25 ⋅ ( 6 ⁄ I )
We can see that the rotor model curve coincides with the manufacturer curve over
the whole current range I/Ib.
We therefore select the Is_therm switching threshold = 1.01 Ib.
The rotor model thus protects the motor over its whole operating range.
146 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
In this example, the stator thermal overload protection is only used to define the
thermal state of the motor, in order to be able to:
b change the locked cold rotor limit time value to its corresponding hot value
b define the hot / cold thermal state of the motor.
SEPED303001EN 147
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models
θa Having used α to designate the ratio R2/(R1+R2), the stator winding relative thermal
capacity used E transfer function is expressed as follows:
Stator thermal model.
( 1 – α) α
E ( p ) = --------------------------------------- + ------------------------------------
rIeq² : heat generated by the copper losses at ( 1 + pτ short ) ( 1 + pτ long )
equivalent current Ieq where 0 < α < 1.
C1 : stator thermal capacity The thermal model time response with two time constants is proportional to the
R1 : thermal resistance between the stator and the square of the current.
motor metal frame t t
C2 : motor thermal capacity ⎛ – --------------------⎞ ⎛ – -----------------⎞
⎜ τ short⎟ ⎜ τ long⎟
R2 : motor thermal resistance (I eq,t) = ( 1 – α) ⋅ ⎜ 1 – e ⎟ + α ⋅ ⎜1 – e 2
⎟ ⋅ I eq
θa : ambient temperature ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
θcu : stator winding temperature ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
Illustration of the influence of the α coefficient on a motor whose time constants are
as follows:
b stator winding: τ short = 4 mn
b metal frame: τ long = 60 mn.
Ttrip in sec
DE81263
100000
0
0.4
1000
0.6
1
100
No thermal exchange
10
1 1.5 2 2.5 l/lb 3
Influence of the α coefficient on a motor.
148 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models
where Tmax is the maximum temperature in the thermal class for the motor
insulating components defined in accordance with standard 60085.
SEPED303001EN 149
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models
where β > 1.
Example: Starting with a zero initial thermal capacity used and applying a current the
same as the rated current Ib, the stator and metal frame relative thermal capacity
used reach 100 %.
3 Initially, the metal frame thermal capacity used has a zero slope, until the heat
transfer is established between the stator and the metal frame.
1
0.9
DE81264
0.8
0.7
0.6
Stator
0.5
Metal
0.4
frame
0.3
0.2
0.1
0 t(s)
0 5000 10000 15000 20000
Stator and metal frame thermal capacity used for a load current Ib.
150 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models
Rs Xs Xr Rr
Rotor thermal model
For the rotor, guide IEEE C37.96-2000 on protection of asynchronous motors defines
DE81180
an adiabatic thermal model, dependent on the slip, which is based on the equivalent
Rm Xm Rr(1-g)/g Steinmetz diagram.
During the asynchronous motor starting phase, rotoric currents travel across the
rotor conductors to a depth that depends on the slip.
Steinmetz diagram.
Therefore the rotor inductance Xr and the rotor resistance Rr vary as a function of
the slip g as follows:
Rs: stator resistance Rr = Kr g + Ro
Xs: stator reactance Xr = Kx g + Xo
Rr: rotor resistance
Xr: rotor reactance Kr: coefficient taking account of the increase in the rotor resistance
Rm: magnetic loss Kx: coefficient taking account of the decrease in the rotor reactance
Xm: magnetizing reactance
g: slip
4
R1
3
DE81181
3.5
2.5
Kr
2
Kx
1.5
R0
1
0.5
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
g
Coefficients Kr and Kx as a function of the slip.
Assuming that the positive sequence rotor resistance Rr+ varies almost linearly
between Ro and R1:
R r+ = ( R 1 – R 0 ) ⋅ g + R 0
The proportion of negative sequence current can be high during the motor starting
phase. As a result the negative sequence rotor resistance Rr- is high in order to
evaluate the rotor thermal capacity used.
It is obtained by replacing the slip g with the negative slip sequence (2 - g).
Thus:
R r- = ( R 1 – R 0 ) ⋅ ( 2 – g ) + R 0
The thermal model used in the Sepam relay measures the active part of the positive
sequence impedance during the motor starting phase to evaluate the slip g.
Depending on the motor status, the positive and negative sequence rotor resistances
are as follows:
SEPED303001EN 151
Protection functions Thermal overload for motors
ANSI code 49RMS
Additional information about the models
Rr ( g ) ⋅ ( 1 – g )
----------------------------------------- ⋅ I 2 Rr ( g )
P P g L 2 ⋅ ---------------
Q = ---- = ------------- = -------------------------------------------------------- = I L
w 1–g 1–g g
Thus:
Q
R r ( g ) = ----- ⋅ g
IL2
When the motor is at rated speed, the torque Q equals the rated torque Qn and the
current equals the rated current In, thus R0 = gn (in pu of Zn).
Where:
Un
Zn = -------------
3Ib
gn: rated slip
When the motor is at its rated speed of rotation, the ratio between the positive and
negative sequence resistances is:
R1 LRT
2 ------- – 1 = 2 --------------------- – 1
R0 gn ⋅ IL 2
During the starting phase the rotor thermal capacity used W is defined by the
following expression:
R r+ Id 2 R r- Ii 2 dt
W n = W n – 1 + ---------- ⎛ -----⎞ + --------- ⎛ -----⎞ ⋅ -------------
R 1 ⎝ I L⎠ R 1 ⎝ I L⎠ T(M)
Where T(M): locked rotor limit time depends on the thermal state of the motor M:
T(M) = Tc - (Tc - Th) x M, where 0 ≤M ≤1.
Tc: locked cold rotor limit time at the starting current IL
Th: locked hot rotor limit time at the starting current IL.
Example for a motor whose starting time is 5 s and the locked cold rotor limit time is
20 s.
b When the rotor is locked, the slip g = 1, as a result Rr+ = R1. Thus the thermal
capacity used is 5/20 = 25 %.
b When the slip g changes from 1 to 0 in 5 s, the rotor thermal capacity used is 17 %.
0.3
Rotor thermal capacity used (in pu)
DE81265
0.25
0.2
S=1
0.15
S#1
0.1
0.05
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
152 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Operation curve
The protection issues a trip order when the heat rise E, calculated according to the
measurement of an equivalent current Ieq, is greater than the set point Es.
The greatest permissible continuous current is
I = Ib Es
The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T.
b the calculated heat rise depends on the current drawn and the previous heat rise
b the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise
b the hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 % rated heat rise.
101
2
⎛ leq
---------⎞
DE50808
10 0
t ⎝ lb ⎠
--- = ln ------------------------------
T ⎛ leq
2
- 3
---------⎞ – Es
10-1 ⎝ lb ⎠
10-2
2
10-3
⎛ leq
---------⎞ – 1
0 5 10 t ⎝ lb ⎠
--- = ln ------------------------------
2
-
T ⎛ leq
ln: natural logarithm. ---------⎞ – Es
⎝ lb ⎠
MT10420
0,63
0,36
0 0
T1 t T2 t
Heat rise time constant. Cooling time constant.
For self-ventilated rotating machines, cooling is more effective when the machine is
running than when it is stopped. Running and stopping of the equipment are
calculated based on the value of the current:
b running if I > 0.1 Ib
b stopped if I < 0.1 Ib.
SEPED303001EN 153
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
b a second group of parameters (time constants and set points) is used to take into
account thermal withstand with locked rotors. This second set of parameters is taken
into account when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is.
154 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Start inhibit
The thermal overload protection can inhibit the closing of the motor control device
until the heat rise drops back down below a value that allows restarting.
This value takes into account the heat rise produced by the motor when starting.
The inhibition function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection
function and the indication START INHIBIT informs the user.
Inhibition of tripping
Tripping of the thermal overload protection may be inhibited by the logic input "Inhibit
thermal overload" when required by the process.
User information
The following information is available for the user:
b heat rise
b learnt cooling time constant T2
b time before restart enabled (in case of inhibition of starting)
b time before tripping (with constant current).
See the section on measurement and machine operation assistance functions.
Block diagram
DE51636
SEPED303001EN 155
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Characteristics
Settings Inputs
Measurement origin Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Setting range I1, I2, I3 / I'1, I'2, I'3 Protection reset P49RMS_1_101 b b
Taking into account the negative sequence component K Protection inhibition P49RMS_1_113 b b
Setting range 0 - 2.25 - 4.59 - 9 Outputs
Taking into account ambient temperature Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Setting range Yes / no Delayed output P49RMS_1_3 b b b
Using the learnt cooling time constant T2 Alarm P49RMS_1_10 b b b
Setting range Yes / no Inhibit closing P49RMS_1_11 b b b
Maximum equipment temperature Tmax (according to Protection inhibited P49RMS_1_16 b b
insulation class) Hot state P49RMS_1_18 b b
Setting range 60 °C to 200 °C or 140 °F to 392 °F Inhibit thermal overload P49RMS_1_32 b b
Resolution 1°C or 1°F
Thermal mode 1
Alarm set point Es1
3 Setting range
Accuracy (1)
Resolution
0 % to 300 %
±2 %
1%
Tripping set point Es2
Setting range 0 % to 300 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Initial heat rise set point Es0
Setting range 0 % to 100 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Heat rise time constant T1
Setting range 1 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Cooling time constant T2
Setting range 5 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Thermal mode 2
Using thermal mode 2
Setting range Yes / no
Alarm set point Es1
Setting range 0 % to 300 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Tripping set point Es2
Setting range 0 % to 300 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Initial heat rise set point Es0
Setting range 0 % to 100 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Heat rise time constant T1
Setting range 1 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Cooling time constant T2
Setting range 5 min. to 600 min.
Resolution 1 min.
Switching set point for thermal mode 2
Setting range 25 % to 800 % of Ib
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1%
Base current Ib - mode 2
Setting range 0.2 to 2.6 In or I’n
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1A
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time accuracy ±2 % or ±1 s
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-8).
156 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
Example 1: motor For an overload of 2Ib, the value t/T1 = 0.0339 (2).
The following data are available: In order for Sepam to trip at point 1 (t = 70 s), T1 is equal to 2065 sec ≈ 34 min.
b time constants for on operation T1 and off operation With a setting of T1 = 34 min., the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state
T2: (point 2). In this case, it is equal to t/T1 = 0.3216 ⇒t = 665 sec, i.e. ≈ 11 min., which
v T1 = 25 min. is compatible with the motor thermal withstand when it is cold.
v T2 = 70 min. The negative sequence factor K is calculated using the equation defined on
b maximum steady state current: page 154.
Imax/Ib = 1.05. The parameters of the 2nd thermal overload relay do not need to be set.
They are not taken into account by default.
Setting of tripping set point Es2
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 % Example 3: motor
Note. If the motor draws a current of 1.05 Ib The following data are available:
continuously, the heat rise calculated by the thermal b motor thermal withstand in the form of hot and cold curves (see solid line curves
overload protection will reach 110 %. in Figure 2)
Setting of alarm set point Es1 b cooling time constant T2
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95). b maximum steady state current: Imax/Ib = 1.1.
Knegative: 4.5 (usual value) The thermal overload parameters are determined in the same way as in the previous
The other thermal overload parameters do not need to
be set. They are not taken into account by default.
example.
Setting of tripping set point Es2
3
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 120 %
Example 2: motor
The following data are available: Setting of alarm set point Es1
b motor thermal withstand in the form of hot and cold Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95).
curves (see solid line curves in Figure 1) The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after
b cooling time constant T2 100 seconds (point 1).
b maximum steady state current: With t/T1 = 0.069 (I/Ib = 2 and Es2 = 120 %):
Imax/Ib = 1.05. ⇒T1 = 100 sec / 0.069 = 1449 sec ≈ 24 min.
The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to:
Setting of tripping set point Es2
t/T1 = 0.3567 ⇒t = 24 min. x 0.3567 = 513 sec (point 2’).
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 %
This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 sec
Setting of alarm set point Es1:
(point 2).
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95).
If the time constant T1 is lowered, the thermal overload protection will trip earlier,
The manufacturer's hot/cold curves (1) may be used to
below point 2.
determine the heating time constant T1.
The risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case (see
The method consists of placing the Sepam hot/cold
Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with U
curves below those of the motor.
= 0.9 Un).
The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering
Figure 1. Motor thermal withstand and thermal the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve.
overload tripping curves. In this example, the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 sec starting
from the cold state.
The following equation is used to obtain the Es0 value:
MT10860
665 ---------------------- – E s2
2 motor hot curve lb lb
Sepam hot curve where:
70 1 t necessary : tripping time necessary starting from a cold state.
I processed : equipment current.
(1) When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot/cold
curves, the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate.
(2) It is possible to use the charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve or the
1.05 2 I/Ib equation of the curve which is given on page 153.
SEPED303001EN 157
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
In numerical values, the following is obtained: Use of the additional setting group
400 s
------------------------ When a motor rotor is locked or is turning very slowly, its thermal behavior is different
24 × 60 s
Es0 = 4 – e × 4 – ( 1.2 ) = 0.3035 ≈ ( 31 % ) from that with the rated load.
By setting Es0 = 31 %, point 2’ is moved downward to In such conditions, the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator. For
obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the high power motors, rotor overheating is most often a limiting factor.
motor thermal withstand when cold (see Figure 3). The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no
Note. A setting Es0 = 100 % therefore means that the longer valid.
hot and cold curves are the same. In order to protect the motor in this case, "excessive starting time" protection may be
used.
Figure 2. Hot/cold curves not compatible with the Nevertheless, motor manufacturers provide the thermal withstand curves when the
motor thermal withstand. rotor is locked, for different voltages at the time of starting.
MT10863
513 2’
motor cold curve
time before tripping/s
3 400 2
motor hot curve
times / s
100 1
1 Sepam hot curve
3
starting at Un 2
starting at 0.9 Un
1.05 2 I/Ib
4 5 6
1.1 2 Is I/Ib
Figure 3. Hot/cold curves compatible with the 1 thermal withstand, motor running
motor thermal withstand via the setting of an initial 2 thermal withstand, motor stopped
heat rise Es0.
3 Sepam tripping curve
4 starting at 65 % Un
MT10862
adjusted Sepam
cold curve 5 starting at 80 % Un
400
2
motor hot curve In order to take these curves into account, the 2nd thermal overload relay may be
used.
100 The time constant in this case is, in theory, shorter, however, it should be determined
1 Sepam hot curve in the same way as that of the 1st relay.
The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the
equivalent current Ieq exceeds the Is value (set point current).
starting at Un
starting at 0.9 Un Example 4. transformer with 2 ventilation modes
1.1 2 I/Ib The following data are available:
The rated current of a transformer with 2 ventilation modes is:
b Ib = 200 A without forced ventilation (ONAN mode), the main operating mode of
the transformer
b Ib = 240 A with forced ventilation (ONAF mode), a temporary operating mode, to
have 20 % more power available
158 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
SEPED303001EN 159
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
3 115
120
0.4095
0.4317
0.3835
0.4041
0.3602
0.3792
0.3390
0.3567
0.2713
0.2849
0.2227
0.2336
0.1865
0.1954
0.1586
0.1661
0.1367
0.1431
0.1191
0.1246
0.1048
0.1096
0.0929
0.0972
0.0830
0.0868
0.0746
0.0780
0.0674
0.0705
0.0612
0.0640
0.0559
0.0584
125 0.4545 0.4250 0.3986 0.3747 0.2988 0.2446 0.2045 0.1737 0.1495 0.1302 0.1144 0.1014 0.0905 0.0813 0.0735 0.0667 0.0609
130 0.4778 0.4465 0.4184 0.3930 0.3128 0.2558 0.2136 0.1813 0.156 0.1358 0.1193 0.1057 0.0943 0.0847 0.0766 0.0695 0.0634
135 0.5016 0.4683 0.4386 0.4117 0.3270 0.2671 0.2228 0.1890 0.1625 0.1414 0.1242 0.1100 0.0982 0.0881 0.0796 0.0723 0.0659
140 0.5260 0.4907 0.4591 0.4308 0.3414 0.2785 0.2321 0.1967 0.1691 0.147 0.1291 0.1143 0.1020 0.0916 0.0827 0.0751 0.0685
145 0.5511 0.5136 0.4802 0.4502 0.3561 0.2900 0.2414 0.2045 0.1757 0.1527 0.1340 0.1187 0.1058 0.0950 0.0858 0.0778 0.0710
150 0.5767 0.5370 0.5017 0.4700 0.3709 0.3017 0.2509 0.2124 0.1823 0.1584 0.1390 0.1230 0.1097 0.0984 0.0889 0.0806 0.0735
155 0.6031 0.5610 0.5236 0.4902 0.3860 0.3135 0.2604 0.2203 0.189 0.1641 0.1440 0.1274 0.1136 0.1019 0.0920 0.0834 0.0761
160 0.6302 0.5856 0.5461 0.5108 0.4013 0.3254 0.2701 0.2283 0.1957 0.1699 0.1490 0.1318 0.1174 0.1054 0.0951 0.0863 0.0786
165 0.6580 0.6108 0.5690 0.5319 0.4169 0.3375 0.2798 0.2363 0.2025 0.1757 0.1540 0.1362 0.1213 0.1088 0.0982 0.0891 0.0812
170 0.6866 0.6366 0.5925 0.5534 0.4327 0.3498 0.2897 0.2444 0.2094 0.1815 0.1591 0.1406 0.1253 0.1123 0.1013 0.0919 0.0838
175 0.7161 0.6631 0.6166 0.5754 0.4487 0.3621 0.2996 0.2526 0.2162 0.1874 0.1641 0.1451 0.1292 0.1158 0.1045 0.0947 0.0863
180 0.7464 0.6904 0.6413 0.5978 0.4651 0.3747 0.3096 0.2608 0.2231 0.1933 0.1693 0.1495 0.1331 0.1193 0.1076 0.0976 0.0889
185 0.7777 0.7184 0.6665 0.6208 0.4816 0.3874 0.3197 0.2691 0.2301 0.1993 0.1744 0.1540 0.1371 0.1229 0.1108 0.1004 0.0915
190 0.8100 0.7472 0.6925 0.6444 0.4985 0.4003 0.3300 0.2775 0.2371 0.2052 0.1796 0.1585 0.1411 0.1264 0.1140 0.1033 0.0941
195 0.8434 0.7769 0.7191 0.6685 0.5157 0.4133 0.3403 0.2860 0.2442 0.2113 0.1847 0.1631 0.1451 0.1300 0.1171 0.1062 0.0967
200 0.8780 0.8075 0.7465 0.6931 0.5331 0.4265 0.3508 0.2945 0.2513 0.2173 0.1900 0.1676 0.1491 0.1335 0.1203 0.1090 0.0993
160 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
SEPED303001EN 161
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
Hot curves
I/Ib 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Es (%)
105 0.6690 0.2719 0.1685 0.1206 0.0931 0.0752 0.0627 0.0535 0.0464 0.0408 0.0363 0.0326 0.0295 0.0268 0.0245 0.0226
110 3.7136 0.6466 0.3712 0.2578 0.1957 0.1566 0.1296 0.1100 0.0951 0.0834 0.0740 0.0662 0.0598 0.0544 0.0497 0.0457
115 1.2528 0.6257 0.4169 0.3102 0.2451 0.2013 0.1699 0.1462 0.1278 0.1131 0.1011 0.0911 0.0827 0.0755 0.0693
120 3.0445 0.9680 0.6061 0.4394 0.3423 0.2786 0.2336 0.2002 0.1744 0.1539 0.1372 0.1234 0.1118 0.1020 0.0935
125 1.4925 0.8398 0.5878 0.4499 0.3623 0.3017 0.2572 0.2231 0.1963 0.1747 0.1568 0.1419 0.1292 0.1183
130 2.6626 1.1451 0.7621 0.5705 0.4537 0.3747 0.3176 0.2744 0.2407 0.2136 0.1914 0.1728 0.1572 0.1438
135 1.5870 0.9734 0.7077 0.5543 0.4535 0.3819 0.3285 0.2871 0.2541 0.2271 0.2048 0.1860 0.1699
140 2.3979 1.2417 0.8668 0.6662 0.5390 0.4507 0.3857 0.3358 0.2963 0.2643 0.2378 0.2156 0.1967
145 1.6094 1.0561 0.7921 0.6325 0.5245 0.4463 0.3869 0.3403 0.3028 0.2719 0.2461 0.2243
150 2.1972 1.2897 0.9362 0.7357 0.6042 0.5108 0.4408 0.3864 0.3429 0.3073 0.2776 0.2526
155 3.8067 1.5950 1.1047 0.8508 0.6909 0.5798 0.4978 0.4347 0.3846 0.3439 0.3102 0.2817
160 2.0369 1.3074 0.9808 0.7857 0.6539 0.5583 0.4855 0.4282 0.3819 0.3438 0.3118
165 2.8478 1.5620 1.1304 0.8905 0.7340 0.6226 0.5390 0.4738 0.4215 0.3786 0.3427
3 170
175
180
1.9042
2.4288
3.5988
1.3063
1.5198
1.7918
1.0076
1.1403
1.2933
0.8210
0.9163
1.0217
0.6914
0.7652
0.8449
0.5955
0.6554
0.7191
0.5215
0.5717
0.6244
0.4626
0.5055
0.5504
0.4146
0.4520
0.4908
0.3747
0.4077
0.4418
185 2.1665 1.4739 1.1394 0.9316 0.7872 0.6802 0.5974 0.5312 0.4772
190 2.7726 1.6946 1.2730 1.0264 0.8602 0.7392 0.6466 0.5733 0.5138
195 4.5643 1.9782 1.4271 1.1312 0.9390 0.8019 0.6985 0.6173 0.5518
200 2.3755 1.6094 1.2483 1.0245 0.8688 0.7531 0.6633 0.5914
I/Ib 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60
Es (%)
105 0.0209 0.0193 0.0180 0.0168 0.0131 0.0106 0.0087 0.0073 0.0063 0.0054 0.0047 0.0042 0.0037 0.0033 0.0030 0.0027 0.0025
110 0.0422 0.0391 0.0363 0.0339 0.0264 0.0212 0.0175 0.0147 0.0126 0.0109 0.0095 0.0084 0.0075 0.0067 0.0060 0.0055 0.0050
115 0.0639 0.0592 0.0550 0.0513 0.0398 0.0320 0.0264 0.0222 0.0189 0.0164 0.0143 0.0126 0.0112 0.0101 0.0091 0.0082 0.0075
120 0.0862 0.0797 0.0740 0.0690 0.0535 0.0429 0.0353 0.0297 0.0253 0.0219 0.0191 0.0169 0.0150 0.0134 0.0121 0.0110 0.0100
125 0.1089 0.1007 0.0934 0.0870 0.0673 0.0540 0.0444 0.0372 0.0317 0.0274 0.0240 0.0211 0.0188 0.0168 0.0151 0.0137 0.0125
130 0.1322 0.1221 0.1132 0.1054 0.0813 0.0651 0.0535 0.0449 0.0382 0.0330 0.0288 0.0254 0.0226 0.0202 0.0182 0.0165 0.0150
135 0.1560 0.1440 0.1334 0.1241 0.0956 0.0764 0.0627 0.0525 0.0447 0.0386 0.0337 0.0297 0.0264 0.0236 0.0213 0.0192 0.0175
140 0.1805 0.1664 0.1540 0.1431 0.1100 0.0878 0.0720 0.0603 0.0513 0.0443 0.0386 0.0340 0.0302 0.0270 0.0243 0.0220 0.0200
145 0.2055 0.1892 0.1750 0.1625 0.1246 0.0993 0.0813 0.0681 0.0579 0.0499 0.0435 0.0384 0.0341 0.0305 0.0274 0.0248 0.0226
150 0.2312 0.2127 0.1965 0.1823 0.1395 0.1110 0.0908 0.0759 0.0645 0.0556 0.0485 0.0427 0.0379 0.0339 0.0305 0.0276 0.0251
155 0.2575 0.2366 0.2185 0.2025 0.1546 0.1228 0.1004 0.0838 0.0712 0.0614 0.0535 0.0471 0.0418 0.0374 0.0336 0.0304 0.0277
160 0.2846 0.2612 0.2409 0.2231 0.1699 0.1347 0.1100 0.0918 0.0780 0.0671 0.0585 0.0515 0.0457 0.0408 0.0367 0.0332 0.0302
165 0.3124 0.2864 0.2639 0.2442 0.1855 0.1468 0.1197 0.0999 0.0847 0.0729 0.0635 0.0559 0.0496 0.0443 0.0398 0.0360 0.0328
170 0.3410 0.3122 0.2874 0.2657 0.2012 0.1591 0.1296 0.1080 0.0916 0.0788 0.0686 0.0603 0.0535 0.0478 0.0430 0.0389 0.0353
175 0.3705 0.3388 0.3115 0.2877 0.2173 0.1715 0.1395 0.1161 0.0984 0.0847 0.0737 0.0648 0.0574 0.0513 0.0461 0.0417 0.0379
180 0.4008 0.3660 0.3361 0.3102 0.2336 0.1840 0.1495 0.1244 0.1054 0.0906 0.0788 0.0692 0.0614 0.0548 0.0493 0.0446 0.0405
185 0.4321 0.3940 0.3614 0.3331 0.2502 0.1967 0.1597 0.1327 0.1123 0.0965 0.0839 0.0737 0.0653 0.0583 0.0524 0.0474 0.0431
190 0.4644 0.4229 0.3873 0.3567 0.2671 0.2096 0.1699 0.1411 0.1193 0.1025 0.0891 0.0782 0.0693 0.0619 0.0556 0.0503 0.0457
195 0.4978 0.4525 0.4140 0.3808 0.2842 0.2226 0.1802 0.1495 0.1264 0.1085 0.0943 0.0828 0.0733 0.0654 0.0588 0.0531 0.0483
200 0.5324 0.4831 0.4413 0.4055 0.3017 0.2358 0.1907 0.1581 0.1335 0.1145 0.0995 0.0873 0.0773 0.0690 0.0620 0.0560 0.0509
162 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Thermal overload for machines
ANSI code 49RMS
Tripping curves
Hot curves
I/Ib 4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Es (%)
105 0.0023 0.0021 0.0017 0.0014 0.0012 0.0010 0.0009 0.0008 0.0007 0.0006 0.0006 0.0005 0.0003 0.0002 0.0002 0.0001
110 0.0045 0.0042 0.0034 0.0029 0.0024 0.0021 0.0018 0.0016 0.0014 0.0013 0.0011 0.0010 0.0006 0.0004 0.0003 0.0003
115 0.0068 0.0063 0.0051 0.0043 0.0036 0.0031 0.0027 0.0024 0.0021 0.0019 0.0017 0.0015 0.0010 0.0007 0.0005 0.0004
120 0.0091 0.0084 0.0069 0.0057 0.0049 0.0042 0.0036 0.0032 0.0028 0.0025 0.0022 0.0020 0.0013 0.0009 0.0007 0.0005
125 0.0114 0.0105 0.0086 0.0072 0.0061 0.0052 0.0045 0.0040 0.0035 0.0031 0.0028 0.0025 0.0016 0.0011 0.0008 0.0006
130 0.0137 0.0126 0.0103 0.0086 0.0073 0.0063 0.0054 0.0048 0.0042 0.0038 0.0034 0.0030 0.0019 0.0013 0.0010 0.0008
135 0.0160 0.0147 0.0120 0.0101 0.0085 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0049 0.0044 0.0039 0.0035 0.0023 0.0016 0.0011 0.0009
140 0.0183 0.0168 0.0138 0.0115 0.0097 0.0084 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0050 0.0045 0.0040 0.0026 0.0018 0.0013 0.0010
145 0.0206 0.0189 0.0155 0.0129 0.0110 0.0094 0.0082 0.0072 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0046 0.0029 0.0020 0.0015 0.0011
150 0.0229 0.0211 0.0172 0.0144 0.0122 0.0105 0.0091 0.0080 0.0070 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0032 0.0022 0.0016 0.0013
155 0.0253 0.0232 0.0190 0.0158 0.0134 0.0115 0.0100 0.0088 0.0077 0.0069 0.0062 0.0056 0.0035 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
160 0.0276 0.0253 0.0207 0.0173 0.0147 0.0126 0.0109 0.0096 0.0085 0.0075 0.0067 0.0061 0.0039 0.0027 0.0020 0.0015
165 0.0299 0.0275 0.0225 0.0187 0.0159 0.0136 0.0118 0.0104 0.0092 0.0082 0.0073 0.0066 0.0042 0.0029 0.0021 0.0016
170
175
0.0323
0.0346
0.0296
0.0317
0.0242
0.0260
0.0202
0.0217
0.0171
0.0183
0.0147
0.0157
0.0128
0.0137
0.0112
0.0120
0.0099
0.0106
0.0088
0.0094
0.0079
0.0084
0.0071
0.0076
0.0045
0.0048
0.0031
0.0034
0.0023
0.0025
0.0018
0.0019
3
180 0.0370 0.0339 0.0277 0.0231 0.0196 0.0168 0.0146 0.0128 0.0113 0.0101 0.0090 0.0081 0.0052 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
185 0.0393 0.0361 0.0295 0.0246 0.0208 0.0179 0.0155 0.0136 0.0120 0.0107 0.0096 0.0086 0.0055 0.0038 0.0028 0.0021
190 0.0417 0.0382 0.0313 0.0261 0.0221 0.0189 0.0164 0.0144 0.0127 0.0113 0.0101 0.0091 0.0058 0.0040 0.0030 0.0023
195 0.0441 0.0404 0.0330 0.0275 0.0233 0.0200 0.0173 0.0152 0.0134 0.0119 0.0107 0.0096 0.0061 0.0043 0.0031 0.0024
200 0.0464 0.0426 0.0348 0.0290 0.0245 0.0211 0.0183 0.0160 0.0141 0.0126 0.0113 0.0102 0.0065 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025
SEPED303001EN 163
Protection functions Breaker failure
ANSI code 50BF
Block diagram
activation by 50/51,
DE80257
"breaker closed"
logic input delayed
output
"breaker closed"
logic equation or
Logipam
activation by pick-up
logic equation or signal
by Logipam
164 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Breaker failure
ANSI code 50BF
Characteristics
Settings
Is set point
Setting range 0.2 In to 2 In
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 0.1 A
Drop out/pick up ratio 87.5 % ±2 %
Time delay T
Setting range 50 ms to 3 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 ms to +15 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Taking into account circuit breaker position
Setting range With / without
Characteristic times
Overshoot time < 35 ms at 2 Is
Inputs
Designation
Protection reset
Syntax
P50BF_1_101
Equations
b
Logipam
b
3
Start 50BF P50BF_1_107 b b
Protection inhibition P50BF_1_113 b b
Breaker closed P50BF_1_119 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50BF_1_1 b b
Delayed output P50BF_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P50BF_1_16 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Example of setting
Below is a case that may be used to determine the time-delay setting of the breaker
failure function:
b overcurrent protection setting: T = inst
b circuit breaker operating time: 60 ms
b auxiliary relay operating time to open the upstream breaker(s): 10 ms.
DE52249
The breaker failure function time delay is the sum of the following times:
b Sepam O1 output relay pick-up time = 10 ms
b circuit breaker opening time = 60 ms
b Breaker failure function overshoot time = 35 ms.
To avoid unwanted tripping of the upstream breakers, add a margin of approximately
20 ms.
The time delay is 125 ms minimum, set at 130 ms.
SEPED303001EN 165
Protection functions Inadvertent energization
ANSI code 50/27
Block diagram
DE50835
Characteristics
Settings
Current set point
Setting range 0.05 to 4 In
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or 0.02 In
Resolution 1A
Drop out/pick up ratio 95.5 % or 0.015 In
Voltage set point
Setting range 10 % to 100 % of Un
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 103 %
Advanced settings
Use of breaker position
Setting range Used / not used
T1 time
Setting range 0 to 10 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
T2 time
Setting range 0 to 10 s
Example: Generator shutdown and inadvertent starting. Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time < 40 ms at 2 Is (typically 30 ms)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P50/27_1_101 b b
Protection inhibition P50/27_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Tripping output P50/27_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P50/27_1_16 b b
Protection ready P50/27_1_35 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
166 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Inadvertent energization
ANSI code 50/27
Example of setting
Synchronous generator data
b S = 3.15 MVA
b Un1 = 6.3 kV
b Xd = 233 %
b X'd = 21 %
b X''d = 15 %
b the generator is connected to a network with a Psc = 10 MVA
b the maximum admissible duration of a voltage sag is 2.5 seconds.
To set the protection function, it is necessary to calculate the rated generator
impedance:
b Ib = S/(3.Un1) = 289 A
b Zn = Un1/ (3.Ib) = 12.59 Ω.
The network impedance is:
Zpsc = (Un1)2/Psc = 3.97 Ω.
The Istart starting current is approximately:
Un1
Istart = -------------------------------------------------------------- = 621 A .
3
X″ d
3 Zpsc + ----------- × Zn⎞
⎛
⎝ 100 ⎠
The current set point is set between 20 % and 50 % of the starting current.
Is = 0, 5 × Istart ≈ 311 A
The voltage set point is often set between 80 % and 85 % of Un. In this example, the
selected set point is Us = 85 %.
The T1 time is set longer than the maximum admissible duration of a voltage sag,
e.g. T1 = 4 sec.
T2 is set to detect the appearance of a current during starting.
For example, T2 = 250 ms.
SEPED303001EN 167
Protection functions Phase overcurrent
ANSI code 50/51
Block diagram
Pick-up output and to logic discrimination
DE81210
I1/I'1
I2/I'2 I > Is
I3/I'3 T 0
&
Delayed
I<Isc min /2 & output
& Confirmation
(optional)
H2 restraint
168 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Phase overcurrent
ANSI code 50/51
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (I) / Additional channels (I’)
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is set point
Setting range Definite time 0.05 In y Is y 24 In expressed in
amperes
IDMT 0.05 In y Is y 2.4 In expressed in
amperes
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.01 In
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.015 In/Is) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting range Definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1)
IDMT
Definite time
100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms 3
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Confirmation
Setting range By undervoltage (unit 1)
By negative sequence overvoltage (unit 1)
None, no confirmation
Timer hold T1
Setting range Definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Harmonic 2 restraint
Setting range 5 to 50 %
Resolution 1%
Minimum short-circuit current Isc
Setting range In to 999 kA
Resolution de 1 to 9.99 0.01
de 10 to 99.9 0.1
de 100 to 999 1
Minimum interval 0.1A
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Is (typically 25 ms)
confirmed instantaneous:
b inst. < 55 ms at 2 Is for Is u 0.3 In (typically 35 ms)
b inst. < 70 ms at 2 Is for Is < 0.3 In (typically 50 ms)
Overshoot time < 50 ms at 2 Is
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Is (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P50/51_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P50/51_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50/51_x_1 b b
Delayed output P50/51_x_3 b b b
Drop out P50/51_x_4 b b
Phase 1 fault P50/51_x_7 b b
Phase 2 fault P50/51_x_8 b b
Phase 3 fault P50/51_x_9 b b
Protection inhibited P50/51_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
b Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
b Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33
b Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93
b Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47
b IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
b IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
b IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
b IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
b IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75
b IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4.
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and IAC types.
SEPED303001EN 169
Protection functions Earth fault
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G
Block diagram
DE80138
!
!
"
! !
170 SEPED303001EN
Earth fault
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I0
I'0
I0Σ (sum of the main phase channels)
I'0Σ (sum of the additional phase channels)
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is0 setting
Definite time 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) expressed in amperes
setting range Sum of CTs 0.01 In y Is0 y 15 In (min. 0.1 A)
With CSH sensor
2 A rating 0.1 to 30 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 300 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
IDMT
+ ACE990
0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A) expressed in amperes
3
setting range Sum of CTs 0.01 In y Is0 y In (min. 0.1 A)
With CSH sensor
2 A rating 0.1 to 2 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 20 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
+ ACE990
EPATR CSH sensor 0.6 to 5 A
Setting range 20 A rating
Core balance CT 0.6 to 5 A
with ACE990
and 15 A y In0 y 50 A
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.004 In0
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.005 In0/Is0) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is0)
Setting range Definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
EPATR-B 0.5 to 1 s
EPATR-C 0.1 to 3 s
Accuracy (1) Definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Harmonic 2 restraint
Fixed threshold 17 % ±3 %
Timer hold T1
Setting range Definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Is0 (typically 25 ms)
Confirmed instantaneous:
b inst < 55 ms at 2 Is0 for Is u 0.3 In0 (typically 35 ms)
b inst < 70 ms at 2 Is0 for Is < 0.3 In0 (typically 50 ms)
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 Is0
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Is0 (for T1 = 0)
x: unit number. Inputs
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
Protection reset P50N/51N_x_101 b b
b Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
b Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Protection inhibition P50N/51N_x_113 b b
b Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93 Outputs
b Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
b IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50N/51N_x_1 b b
b IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
b IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32 Delayed output P50N/51N_x_3 b b b
b IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08 Drop out P50N/51N_x_4 b b
b IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 Protection inhibited P50N/51N_x_16 b b
b IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4. 15 A set point output P50N/51N_x_56 b b
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and
IAC types.
SEPED303001EN 171
Protection functions Earth fault
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G
EPATR-B curves
EPATR-B tripping curves are defined from the following equations:
DE80213
85,386 T
b for Is0 y I0 y 6.4 A - × -------
t = --------------- -
I0 0, ( 708 ) 0,8
140,213 T
b for 6.4 A y I0 y 200 A - × --------
t = --------------------
I0 0,975 0,8
EPATR-C curves
t
EPATR-C tripping curves are defined from the following equations:
DE80071
172 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Voltage-restrained overcurrent
ANSI code 50V/51V
b the customized curve, defined point by point, may be used with this protection
function
b an adjustable timer hold, definite time or IDMT, can be used for coordination with
electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults
b the set point is adjusted according to the lowest of the phase-to-phase voltages
measured. The adjusted set point I*s is defined by the following equation:
----- × ⎛ 4 -------
I*s = Is U
- – 0.2⎞
3 ⎝ Un ⎠
Tripping curve
Definite time (DT)
Standard inverse time (SIT)
Timer hold
Definite time
Definite time
3
Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Definite time
Extremely inverse time (EIT) Definite time
Ultra inverse time (UIT) Definite time
Set point adjustment. RI curve Definite time
IEC inverse time SIT / A Definite time or IDMT
IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B Definite time or IDMT
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C Definite time or IDMT
IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) Definite time or IDMT
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) Definite time or IDMT
IAC inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC very inverse Definite time or IDMT
IAC extremely inverse Definite time or IDMT
Customized Definite time
Block diagram
DE50841
SEPED303001EN 173
Protection functions Voltage-restrained overcurrent
ANSI code 50V/51V
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (I) / Additional channels (I’)
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is set point
Setting range Definite time 0.5 In y Is y 24 In expressed in amperes
IDMT 0.5 In y Is y 2.4 In expressed in amperes
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % (with min. reset variance of 0.015 In)
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting range Definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) Definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
3 Resolution
IDMT
10 ms or 1 digit
Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Advanced settings
Timer hold T1
Setting range Definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT time (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 35 ms at 2 Is (typically 25 ms)
Inst. < 50 ms at 2 Is (confirmed instantaneous) (typically 35 ms)
Overshoot time < 50 ms
Reset time < 50 ms (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P50V/51V_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P50V/51V_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P50V/51V_x_1 b b
Delayed output P50V/51V_x_3 b b b
Drop out P50V/51V_x_4 b b
Phase 1 fault P50V/51V_x_7 b b
Phase 2 fault P50V/51V_x_8 b b
Phase 3 fault P50V/51V_x_9 b b
Protection inhibited P50V/51V_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
b Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
b Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33
b Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93
b Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47
b IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
b IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
b IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
b IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
b IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75
b IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4.
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and IAC types.
174 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Capacitor bank unbalance
ANSI code 51C
Block diagram
DE51551
Characteristics
Settings 3
Set point Is
Setting range 0.02 I’n to 2 I’n with a minimum value of 0.05 A
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Resolution 0.01 A
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 %
Time delay
Setting range 0.1 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time Pick-up < 35 ms
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 50 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P51C_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P51C_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output P51C_x_1 b b
Tripping output P51C_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibed P51C_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 175
Protection functions Overvoltage (L-L or L-N)
ANSI code 59
It can be used for monitoring unbalance in the capacitor banks on each of the
phases, when they are fitted with VTs, using the additional channels in the B83
application.
Block diagram
3
DE51626
Connection conditions
Type of V1, V2, V3 (1) U21, U32 U21, U21 (1) V1 (1)
connection + V0 U32
Phase-to-neutral YES YES NO NO On V1 only
operation
Phase-to-phase YES YES YES On U21 NO
operation only
(1) With or without V0.
176 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Overvoltage (L-L or L-N)
ANSI code 59
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (U) / Additional channels (U’)
Voltage mode
Setting range Phase-to-phase voltage / Phase-to-neutral voltage
Us (or Vs) set point
Setting range 50 % to 150 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns < 208 V
50 % to 135 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns u 208 V
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 97 % ±1 %
U’s (or V’s) set point for additional channels of the B83 application
Setting range 1.5 % to 150 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns < 208 V
1.5 % to 135 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns u 208 V
minimum setting = 1.5 V
Accuracy (1)
3
2 % or 0.002 Unp )
SEPED303001EN 177
Protection functions Neutral voltage displacement
ANSI code 59N
DE50785
Block diagram
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (V0)
Additional channels (V’0)
Neutral-point voltage (Vnt)
Tripping curve
Setting range Definite time
IDMT (dependent on the residual voltage V0)
Vs0 set point
Definite time setting range 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp (for residual voltage V0)
2 % Vntp to 80 % Vntp (for neutral point voltage Vnt)
IDMT setting range 2 % Unp to 10 % Unp (for residual voltage V0)
2 % Vntp to 10 % Vntp (for neutral point voltage Vnt)
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 97 % ±2 % or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vs0) x 100 %
Time delay T (tripping time at 2 Vs0)
Definite time setting range 50 ms to 300 s
IDMT setting range 100 ms to 10 s
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 45 ms (typically 25 ms) at 2 Vs0
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 Vs0
Reset time < 40 ms at 2 Vs0
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P59N_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P59N_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P59N_x_1 b b
Delayed output P59N_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P59N_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
178 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions 100 % stator earth fault
ANSI code 64G
SEPED303001EN 179
Protection functions Restricted earth fault differential
ANSI code 64REF
The protected zone is between the 3 phases CTs I1, I2, I3 (or I’1, I’2, I’3) and the
neutral point current measurement I0 (or I’0).
The vector associated with the current sensors determines the conventional direction
of connection.
P2 P1
DE80774
I0
S2 S1
Principle
Protection is activated if the following 3 conditions are met:
DE80791
120 %
Istab
b Id0 > Is0
b Id0 > 1.2 × Istab
3 Tripping zone
b Δ I0 > min ( Is0/4, I0min )
With:
b Id0: differential residual current
b Is0: adjustable trip set point of the protection function
b Istab: stabilization current
b ΔI0: variation of the neutral point current
b I0min: nominal current of the neutral point:
v I0min = 0.05 x In0 si In0 > 20 A
0.8 Is0 max. v I0min = 0.10 x In0 si In0 ≤20 A
Through current It
The through current It provides the protection with discrimination and rendered
immunity in relation to external multi-phase faults.
It = max ( IR0, β ⋅ IR1 )
With:
b IR0 = I0 Σ + I0 ⁄ 2: residual component sensitive to single-phase faults
b IR1 = Id – Ii : component sensitive to multi-phase faults
b β : coefficient depending on the nature of the external fault:
v β = max ( 2, Id ⁄ Ib ) for two-phase/earth or three-phase/earth faults
v β = 0 for single-phase faults
180 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Restricted earth fault differential
ANSI code 64REF
Block diagram
Ii βIR1
βIR1 = β.( Id - Ii )
DE80792
Id Stabilization Istab
current calculation
I0 (or I'0 )
input IR0
IR0 = I0Σ+I0 2
I0 (or I'0)
input
Id0
Id0 > 1.2 Istab
Id0 =
SEPED303001EN 181
Protection functions Restricted earth fault differential
ANSI code 64REF
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (I, I0)
Additional channels (I’, I’0)
Is0
Setting range 0.05 In to 0.8 In for In u 20 A
0.1 In to 0.8 In for In < 20 A
Accuracy (1) 5%
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 % ±2 %
Characteristic times
Operation time < 55 ms at Id0 = 2.4 Istab
Overshoot time < 35 ms at Id0 = 2.4 Istab
Reset time < 45 ms at Id0 = 2.4 Istab
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P64REF_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P64REF_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Protection output P64REF_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P64REF_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
182 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66
The "stop/start" time delay is used to impose a minimum stopping time between each
start.
The motor "hot state" data item is determined by the 49RMS motor thermal overload
protection. A "hot state" set point can also be configured using this protection
function (see page 140).
Note: When the 49RMS generic thermal overload protection is used, if ES0 is different from
0%, the ANSI 66 protection function may not work properly.
3
As the "hot state" set point is fixed at 50% in the ANSI 66 protection function, according
to ES0 setting value, the cold state for the 66 protection function may be reduced or not exist.
So the number of starts will be limited by the number of consecutive hot starts, with no impact
of number of consecutive cold starts setting.
When the motor curves imply to use ES0 setting to move the "cold curve", it is highly adviced
to use the thermal model based on two time constants, that avoid this setting difficulty.
Block diagram
Adjustable delay
DE81266
T = 100 ms T = 100 ms
Motor
re-acceleration logic equation 0 T 0 T ≥1 Inhibit closing
≥1 &
Adjustable
& delay between
Closed circuit breaker consecutive starts &
& K1 ≥ Nc
position not read
0 Tcons
Closed circuit 0 T ≥1
breaker
T = 100 ms
Clear
Confirmation of counting by circuit breaker position & K2 ≥ Nh
Reset
≥1
counters
Clear
Logic input
Authorize emergency restart
Operating information
The following information is available to the operator:
the number of starts before inhibition
start inhibit time
(See machine operation help functions on page 58).
SEPED303001EN 183
Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66
Characteristics
Settings
Delay between consecutive starts (Tcons)
Setting range 1 mn to 90 mn
Resolution 1 mn
Permitted number of consecutive cold starts (Nc)
Setting range 1 to 5
Resolution 1
Permitted number of consecutive hot starts (Nh)
Setting range 1 to (Nc -1)
Resolution 1
Delay between stop/start
Setting range 0 to 90 mn (0 no time delay)
Resolution 1 mn
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Reset protection P66_1_101 b b
Motor re-acceleration P66_1_102 b b
3 Inhibit protection
Outputs
Designation
P66_1_113
Syntax
b
Equations
b
Logipam Matrix
Protection output P66_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P66_1_16 b b
Stop/start inhibit P66_1_29 b b
Startup total reached P66_1_30 b b
Consecutive startups reached P66_1_31 b b
184 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66
Therefore:
2980
g n = 1 – ------------------ = 0,0067
60 ⋅ 50
The rotor constant is given by:
τ = (Tc - Th) . LRT / gn
Hence:
τ = (13 - 9) . 0.7 / 0.0067 = 420 s, or 7 mn
Hence:
SEPED303001EN 185
Protection functions Starts per hour
ANSI code 66
186 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent
ANSI code 67
MT11128
current direction.
Description
This function comprises a phase overcurrent function
associated with direction detection and picks up if the
phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line
or busbar) is activated for at least one of the 3 phases
(or two of the three phases, depending on the settings).
b the protection function is three-phase and has a
DE50667
definite or IDMT time delay.
b each of the two units has two groups of settings.
Switching to setting group A or B can be carried out by
a logic input or a remote control order, depending on
the settings.
b the customized curve, defined point by point, may be
3
used with this protection function.
b an adjustable timer hold, definite time or IDMT, can
be used for coordination with electromagnetic relays
and to detect restriking faults.
b the alarm linked to the protection function indicates Fault tripping in line zone with θ = 30°.
the faulty phase or phases.
Tripping direction
The direction of the current is determined according to
DE50668
Polarization value
The polarization value is the phase-to-phase value in
quadrature with the current for cosθ = 1 (90° connection
angle). A phase current vector plane is divided into two
half-planes that correspond to the line zone and busbar
zone. The characteristic angle θ is the angle of the
perpendicular to the boundary line between the 2 zones
and the polarization value.
Voltage memory
Should all the voltages disappear during a 3-phase Fault tripping in line zone with θ = 60°.
fault near the busbars, the voltage level may be
insufficient for the fault direction to be detected (< 1.5 % Tripping logic
Unp). The protection function therefore uses a voltage In certain cases, it is wise to select the "two out of three phases" tripping logic. Such
memory to reliably determine the direction. The fault cases may occur when two parallel transformers (Dy) must be protected. For a 2-
direction is saved as long as the voltage level is too low phase fault on a transformer primary winding, there is a 2-1-1 current distribution at
and the current is above the Is set point. the secondary end. The highest current is in the expected zone (operation zone for
Closing on a pre-existing fault the faulty incomer, no operation zone for the fault-free incomer).
If the circuit breaker is closed when there is a pre- One of the lowest currents is at the edge of the zone. According to the line
existing 3-phase fault on the busbars, the voltage parameters, it may even be in the wrong zone.
memory is blank. As a result, the direction cannot be There is therefore a risk of tripping both incomers.
determined and the protection does not trip.
In such cases, a backup 50/51 protection function
should be used.
SEPED303001EN 187
Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent
ANSI code 67
Block diagram
DE52315
phase 1
instantaneous
DE50849
DE80139
phase 2
instantaneous
phase 3
instantaneous
DE51628
DE52316
188 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent
ANSI code 67
Characteristics 3
Settings
Characteristic angle θ
Setting range 30°, 45°, 60°
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Tripping curve
Setting range See list above
Is set point
Setting range definite time 0.1 In y Is y 24 In in amperes
IDMT 0.1 In y Is y 2.4 In in amperes
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.01 In
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.015 In/Is) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting range definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) definite time (4) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
For T u 100 ms IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Busbar / line
Tripping logic
Setting range One out of three / two out of three
Timer hold T1
Setting range definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 75 ms at 2 Is (typically 65 ms)
Inst. < 90 ms at 2 Is (confirmed
instantaneous) (typically 75 ms)
Overshoot time < 45 ms at 2 Is
Reset time < 55 ms at 2 Is (for T1 = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P67_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P67_x_113 b b
Outputs
x: unit number. Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). Instantaneous output (pick-up) P67_x_1 b b
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode Delayed output P67_x_3 b b b
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Drop out P67_x_4 b b
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93 Instantaneous output (reverse P67_x_6 b b
Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 zone)
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86 Phase 1 fault P67_x_7 b b
IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57 Phase 2 fault P67_x_8 b b
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
Phase 3 fault P67_x_9 b b
IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 Protection inhibited P67_x_16 b b
IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4. Instantaneous output at 0.8 Is P67_x_21 b b
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and 1 out of 3 delayed output P67_x_36 b b
IAC types. 2 out of 3 delayed output P67_x_37 b b
SEPED303001EN 189
Protection functions Directional earth fault
ANSI code 67N/67NC
The tripping zone is set for tripping in busbar zone or tripping in line zone.
The reverse zone is the zone for which the protection function does not trip.
The detection of current in the reverse zone is used for indication.
190 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 1
ANSI code 67N/67NC
periodically. Even when a Petersen coil with no additional resistance is used, tripping
θ0 = 0˚ is ensured due to fault detection during the transient fault appearance. Detection is
extended throughout the duration of the fault based on the criterion V0 u V0mem,
within the limit of T0mem. With this type of application, T0mem must be greater than
sector T (definite time delay).
V0
tripping zone
Block diagram
DE80140
SEPED303001EN 191
Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 1
ANSI code 67N/67NC
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I0 / I’0
Characteristic angle θ
Setting range -45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Accuracy (1) ±2°
Is0 setting
Setting range 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
in amperes
With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0.1 to 30 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 300 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT with ACE990 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % (at ϕ0 = 180°)
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
Time delay T (definite time (DT) tripping curve)
3 Setting range
Accuracy (1)
Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Busbar / line
Vs0 set point
Setting range 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vs0) x 100 %
Sector
Setting range 86°, 83°, 76°
Accuracy With CCA634 ±2°
With CT + CSH30 ±3°
Memory time T0mem
Setting range 0; 0.05 to 300 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Memory voltage V0mem
Setting range 0; 2 to 80 % of Unp
Resolution 1%
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 55 ms at 2 Is0
Overshoot time < 45 ms at 2 Is0
Reset time < 65 ms (at T0mem = 0)
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P67N_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P67N_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P67N_x_1 b b
Delayed output P67N_x_3 b b b
Drop-out P67N_x_4 b b
Instantaneous output (reverse zone) P67N_x_6 b b
Protection inhibited P67N_x_16 b b
Instantaneous output at 0.8 Is0 P67N_x_21 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
Standard setting
The settings below are given for usual applications in the different earthing systems.
The shaded boxes represent default settings.
Isolated neutral Impedant neutral Compensated
neutral
Is0 set point Set according to Set according to Set according to
discrimination study discrimination study discrimination study
Characteristic angle θ0 90° 0° 0°
Time delay T Set according to Set according to Set according to
discrimination study discrimination study discrimination study
Direction Line Line Line
Vs0 set point 2 % of Uns 2 % of Uns 2 % of Uns
Sector N/A 86° 86°
Memory time T0mem 0 0 200 ms
Memory voltage 0 0 0
V0mem
192 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 2
ANSI code 67N/67NC
V0
An adjustable timer hold, definite time or IDMT, can be used for coordination with
electromagnetic relays and to detect restriking faults. 3
V2 V3 Tripping curve Timer hold
Definite time (DT) Definite time
Standard inverse time (SIT) Definite time
Example of phase 1 to earth fault - Measurement of the 3 phase Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Definite time
voltages. Extremely inverse time (EIT) Definite time
Ultra inverse time (UIT) Definite time
RI curve Definite time
IEC inverse time SIT / A Definite time or IDMT
DE80357
V0
Block diagram
DE80141
SEPED303001EN 193
Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 2
ANSI code 67N/67NC
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range I0
I’0
I0Σ (sum of the main phase channels)
Characteristic angle θ
Setting range -45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Accuracy (1) ±2°
Tripping curve
Setting range See previous page
Is0 set point
Definite time 0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
setting range in amperes
Sum of CTs 0.01 In y Is0 y 15 In (min. 0.1 A)
With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0.1 to 30 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 300 A
3 CT
Core balance CT with ACE990
0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
0.01 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
IDMT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (mini 0.1 A)
setting range in amperes
Sum of CTs 0.01 In y Is0 y In (min. 0.1 A)
With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0.1 to 2 A
20 A rating 0.2 to 20 A
CT 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT with ACE990 0.01 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.004 In0
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
or > (1 - 0.005 In0/Is0) x 100 %
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is0)
Setting range definite time Inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
Accuracy (1) definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Tripping direction
Setting range Busbar / line
Vs0 set point
Setting range 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 % ±5 %
or > (1 - 0.006 Unp/Vs0) x 100 %
Timer hold T1
Setting range definite time 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 40 ms at 2 Is0
(typically 25 ms)
Inst. < 55 ms at 2 Is0 (confirmed
instantaneous) (typically 35 ms)
Overshoot time < 35 ms at 2 Is0
Reset time < 50 ms at 2 Is0 (for T1 = 0)
x: unit number. Inputs
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
Protection reset P67N_x_101 b b
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Protection inhibition P67N_x_113 b b
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93 Outputs
Ext. inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86 Instantaneous output (pick-up) P67N_x_1 b b
IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
Delayed output P67N_x_3 b b b
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08 Drop out P67N_x_4 b b
IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 Instantaneous output (reverse zone) P67N_x_6 b b
IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4. Protection inhibited P67N_x_16 b b
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and Instantaneous output at 0.8 Is0 P67N_x_21 b b
IAC types.
194 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 3
ANSI Code 67N/67NC
Type 3 operation
This protection operates like an earth fault protection function (ANSI 50N/51N) with
DE51173
Simplified schematic
immidiate
output
DE80142
Is0 I0
Definite time protection principle.
SEPED303001EN 195
Protection functions Directional earth fault - Type 3
ANSI Code 67N/67NC
Type 3 characteristics
Measurement origin
Setting range I0
I’0
I0Σ (sum of the main phase channels)
Tripping zone start angle Lim.1
Setting 0° to 359°
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±3°
Tripping zone end angle Lim.2
Setting 0° to 359° (1)
Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±3°
Tripping direction
Setting Line/busbar
Is0 set point
196 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Loss of synchronism
ANSI code 78PS
Current sensors
Current transformers must be:
b either type 5P20, with an accuracy burden of VATC > RfIn²
where VATC: CT rated burden
3
In : secondary rated current of the CT
Rf: wiring resistance
b or defined by a kneepoint voltage Vk u (RTC + Rf).20.In
where RTC: CT internal resistance.
dθm dδ 1
Ωm = ------------ = ------- × ------
dt dt np
J: total moment of inertia (generator + turbine or motor + load)
Ωm: rotor speed
Pm: mechanical power (supplied by the turbine or taken by the motor load)
Pe: active electrical power (supplied by the generator or taken by the motor)
θm: mechanical internal angle of the synchronous machine
δ: electrical internal angle of the synchronous machine.
SEPED303001EN 197
Protection functions Loss of synchronism
ANSI code 78PS
Pm δ
Network stability Stable
P Internal angle
P detection Tosc/2
≥1 Fault calculation dΩ
1 0 T
0 J
Sustained fault
0 takes priority
Voltage loss
detection
198 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Loss of synchronism
ANSI code 78PS
Equal-area criterion
The algorithm is based on calculating the acceleration area on appearance of a fault,
then the braking area on disappearance of the fault.
Protection tripping
The trip order is given if the braking area is less than the acceleration area.
The function calculates in steady state the average over 4 seconds of active power,
which corresponds to the mechanical power before the fault, Pad, supplied by the
turbine or taken by the motor load.
Comparison of the areas is initialized when the active power differs from the
mechanical power by more than 5 %.
A time delay can be used to postpone tripping. The protection function is reset if a
return to stability is detected during this time delay.
Block diagram
start
DE_&é&&
3
Pad calculation
no
P < Pad ?
yes
acceleration area
calculation
no
P > Pad ?
yes
braking area
calculation
no
P < Pad ?
yes
acceleration area no
>
braking area
no
yes
loss of synchronism :
time delay downcounts
no yes
time delay elapsed stability returned ?
yes
tripping
SEPED303001EN 199
Protection functions Loss of synchronism
ANSI code 78PS
IPower swings
The algorithm is based on detecting inversion of the active power sign.
A power swing corresponds to 2 consecutive inversions of the active power sign.
The protection trips when the number of power swings equals the configured set
point.
A time delay is used to fix a maximum period between 2 power swings, in order
to make the protection immune to low-frequency power swings.
Block diagram
DE81203
0
P
P < -5% Sn 1 &
P > 5% Sn
Tripping output
≥1 N = N+1 N ≥ 2 Nt
3 0
0
Reset
T
P > 5% Sn 1 &
Time between 2 turns
P < -5% Sn
Characteristics
Settings
Choosing the type of trip
Setting range Internal angle calculation
Internal angle and power swing calculation
Equal-area criterion
Power swing
Equal-area criterion and power swing
Internal angle calculation
Stabilization delay Tstg
Setting range 1 s y Tstg y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2% or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 100 ms or 1 digit
Maximum internal angle variation δs
Setting range 100 ° y δs y 1000 °
Resolution (1) 10 °
Confirmation delay Ts
Setting range 0 y Ts y 300 ms
Accuracy (1) ±2% or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Equal-area criterion
Confirmation delay V
Setting range 100 ms y T y 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2% or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Power swings
Number of turns Nt
Setting range 1 y Nt y 30
Resolution 1
Maximum time between 2 turns V
Setting range 1 s y T y 300 s
Resolution 1 s or 1 digit
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Reset protection P78PS_1_101 b b
Inhibit protection P78PS_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P78PS_1_1 b b
Time-delayed output P78PS_1_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P78PS_1_16 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
200 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Loss of synchronism
ANSI code 78PS
2H
Tosc = 2 π ⋅ ----------------
-
Ks ⋅ ω
Where:
ω: electrical network pulsation in rd/s
H: mechanical system inertia constant in seconds:
J ⋅ ( ω ⁄ np )
2
H = ------------------------------
3
2 ⋅ Sn
Ks: synchronizing coefficient in pu
np: number of pairs of poles
Sn: synchronous machine apparent power in VA
Synchronizing coefficient
The synchronizing coefficient Ks characterizes the ability of the synchronous
machine to resynchronize itself. It depends on the synchronous machine's operating
point before the fault appeared in the network. It is defined by the following
expression:
Eqo ⋅ V
Ks = ------------------ ⋅ cos δ + V ⋅ ------- – -------- ⋅ cos 2δ
2 1 1
Xd′ Xq Xd'
Field voltage
The field voltage in transient state Eqo is determined by the projecting the next vector
DE81202
SEPED303001EN 201
Protection functions Loss of synchronism
ANSI code 78PS
3 In this example, the initial internal angle is 25.55°. According to the graph below, we
can see that the active power available when stationary cannot exceed 1.15 pu,
whereas in transient state it can reach 5.24 pu.
Torque in pu
6
DE81204
Dynamic range
4
1
Static range
0
0 20 25.5 40 60 65 80 100 115 120 140 160 180
Internal angle in degrees
Representation of the torque as a function of the internal angle in dynamic and static states.
202 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79
SEPED303001EN 203
Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79
Characteristics
Settings
Number of cycles
Setting range 1 to 4
Activation of cycle 1
Protection 50/51 units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 50N/51N units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67 units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67N/67NC units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Logic equations or Logipam outputs active/inactive
V_TRIPCB
Activation of cycles 2, 3 and 4
Protection 50/51 units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 50N/51N units 1 to 4 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67 units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Protection 67N/67NC units 1 to 2 inst. / delayed / no activation
Logic equations or Logipam outputs active/inactive
V_TRIPCB
3 Time delays
Reclaim time 0.1 to 300 s
Dead time Cycle 1 0.1 to 300 s
Cycle 2 0.1 to 300 s
Cycle 3 0.1 to 300 s
Cycle 4 0.1 to 300 s
Safety time until ready 0 to 60 s
Maximum additional dead time 0.1 to 60 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection inhibition P79_1_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Recloser in service P79 _1_201 b b b
Recloser ready P79 _1_202 b b b
Cleared fault P79 _1_203 b b b
Final trip P79 _1_204 b b b
Closing by recloser P79 _1_205 b b
Reclosing cycle 1 P79 _1_211 b b b
Reclosing cycle 2 P79 _1_212 b b b
Reclosing cycle 3 P79 _1_213 b b b
Reclosing cycle 4 P79 _1_214 b b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
204 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79
SEPED303001EN 205
Protection functions Recloser
ANSI code 79
206 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Overfrequency
ANSI code 81H
Block diagram
DE50791
3
1) Or U21, or 3.V1 > Vs if only one TP.
Characteristics
Settings
Measurement origin
Setting range Main channels (U) / Additional channels (U’)
Fs set point
Setting range 49 to 55 Hz or 59 to 65 Hz
Accuracy (1) ±0.01 Hz
Resolution 0.01
Pick up / drop out difference 0.05 Hz ± 0.015 Hz
Time delay T
Setting range 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Advanced settings
Vs set point
Setting range 20 % Un to 90 % Un
Accuracy (1) 2%
Resolution 1%
Characteristic times
Operation time Pick-up < 90 ms from Fs -0.5 Hz to Fs +0.5 Hz
Overshoot time < 50 ms from Fs -0.5 Hz to Fs +0.5 Hz
Reset time < 55 ms from Fs +0.5 Hz to Fs -0.5 Hz
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P81H_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P81H_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P81H_x_1 b b
Delayed output P81H_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P81H_x_16 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.
SEPED303001EN 207
Protection functions Underfrequency
ANSI code 81L
Block diagram
3
DE50861
208 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Rate of change of frequency
ANSI code 81R
Block diagram
3
de51554
Characteristics
Settings
dfs/dt set point
Setting range 0.1 to 10 Hz/s
Accuracy (1) ±5 % or ±0,1 Hz
Resolution 0.01 Hz
Drop out/pick up ratio 93 %
Temporisation
Setting range 0.15 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or -10 at +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time Pick-up < 150 ms (typically 130 ms)
Overshoot time < 100 ms
Reset time < 100 ms
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P81R_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P81R_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Instantaneous output (pick-up) P81R_x_1 b b
Tripping output P81R_x_3 b b b
Protection inhibited P81R_x_16 b b
Invalid voltage P81R_x_42 b b
Invalid frequency P81R_x_43 b b
Positive df/dt P81R_x_44 b b
Negative df/dt P81R_x_45 b b
x: unit number.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.
SEPED303001EN 209
Protection functions Rate of change of frequency
ANSI code 81R
Disconnection application
This function is used on incomers of installations that include generators that can
operate in parallel with the distribution network.
The role of the function is to detect utility failures, i.e. operation of the generator as
an autonomous isolated system. If the power flow from the utility prior to autonomous
generator operation was not zero, the generator frequency changes.
The rate of change of frequency protection function detects autonomous generator
operation more rapidly than conventional frequency protection functions.
Other disturbances such as short-circuits, load fluctuations and switching may cause
changes of frequency. The low set point may be reached temporarily due to these
disturbances and a time delay is necessary. In order to maintain the advantage of the
speed of the rate of change of frequency protection in comparison to conventional
frequency protection functions, a second, higher set point with a short time delay may
be added.
The rate of change of frequency is actually not constant. Often, the rate of change of
3 frequency is at its highest at the beginning of the disturbance after which it
decreases. This extends the tripping time of frequency protection functions but does
not affect the tripping time of the rate of change of frequency protection function.
Low set point setting
b Follow the utility's instructions, if there are any.
b If there are no utility instructions, proceed as follows:
v if the maximum rate of change of frequency on the network under normal
conditions is known, dfs/dt should be set above it.
v if no information on the network is available, the low set point may be set according
to generator data.
A good approximation of the rate of change of frequency after a utility failure resulting
in a load variation ΔP is:
df ΔP × fn where Sn: rated power
------ = ------------------------------ fn: rated frequency
dt 2 × Sn × H
H: inertia constant
Typical value of the inertia constant (in MWs/MVA):
b 0.5 y H y 1.5 for diesel and low-power generators (y 2 MVA)
b 2 y H y 5 for gas turbines and medium-power generators (y 40 MVA)
J × Ω2 where J: moment of inertia
H = ------------------ Ω: machine speed
2 × Sn
Examples
Rated power 2 MVA 20 MVA
Inertia constant 0.5 MWs/MVA 2 MWs/MVA
Power variation 0.1 MVA 1 MVA
df/dt -2.5 Hz/s -0.6 Hz/s
210 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Rate of change of frequency
ANSI code 81R
Operating precautions:
When the generator connects to the network, power oscillations may occur until the
generator becomes fully synchronized. The rate of change of frequency protection
function is sensitive to this phenomenon, so it is advisable to inhibit the protection
unit for a few seconds after circuit breaker closing.
SEPED303001EN 211
Protection functions Machine differential
ANSI code 87M
DE52189
212 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Machine differential
ANSI code 87M
Tripping restraints
Restraint for external faults or machine starting
During starting or an external fault, the through current is much higher than 1.5 In. As
long as the CTs do not saturate, the differential current is low. This transient state is
detected by the following characteristic:
2 2
Idx Itx 2
------------- – ----------- < – ( 0.25 In) where x = 1, 2, 3
2 32
An external fault can be followed by a short, but high differential current, that is why
a 200 ms restraint is used to ensure protection stability for this type of fault.
Restraint on CT saturation
CT saturation can result in a false differential current and nuisance tripping. The
restraint analyses the asymmetry of the signals and restrains the tripping order if a
CT is saturated.
3
Restraint on CT loss
CT loss can result in a false differential current and nuisance tripping. This restraint
is the means to detect a measurement that abnormally drops to zero (sample
analysis).
Block diagram
DE52288
CT loss can result in a false differential current and nuisance tripping. This restraint
is activated if the following 3 criteria are met. The first two criteria identify the
potentially defective CT; the third confirms the CT loss.
1) A residual current (SUM3I) is detected from one side of the windings and only one.
(Iso: internal threshold, non-adjustable)
2) The differential current is higher than the threshold Is on one phase and only one.
Id1 > Is Id2 > Is Id3 > Is
3) Abnormal number of zero value samples ( ix <0.02 × In) is measured on the
considered input.
The restraint is disabled if one criterion is not met.
= Exclusive OR (XOR)
SEPED303001EN 213
Protection functions Machine differential
ANSI code 87M
Characteristics
Settings
3 Is set point
Setting range In ≤ 20 A: max(0.1 In; 0.1 I’n) y Is y min(0.5 In; 0.5 I’n)
In > 20 A: max(0.05 In; 0.05 I'n) ≤ Is ≤ max(0.5 In; 0.5 I’n)
Accuracy (1) ±5 % Is or ±0.4 % In
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Drop out/pick up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
Advanced settings
Pick-up of restraint on CT loss
Setting range On / off
Characteristic times
Operation time Operation time of differential current function
Overshoot time < 45 ms at 2 Is
Reset time < 40 ms at 2 Is
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Protection reset P81L_x_101 b b
Protection inhibition P81L_x_113 b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Protection output P87M_1_3 b b b
Phase 1 fault P87M_1_7 b b
Phase 2 fault P87M _1_8 b b
Phase 3 fault P87M _1_9 b b
Protection inhibited P87M_1_16 b b
High set point P87M_1_33 b b
Percentage-based set point P87M_1_34 b b
CT loss P87M_1_39 b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
214 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
Phase-to-phase short-circuit According to the current measurement convention shown in the diagram and
protection for transformers respecting the recommended wiring system, the differential currents Id and through
currents It are calculated using the matched currents Im and I’m.
and transformer-machine units (2 windings)
Differential current: Idx = I xm + I‘ xm where x = 1, 2 or 3
Through current: Itx = max ( I xm , I‘ xm ) where x = 1, 2 or 3
Operation
This protection function protects the zone between the The function picks up if the differential current of at least one phase is greater than
sensors for the main currents I1, I2, I3 on the one hand the operating threshold defined by:
and the sensors for the additional currents I'1, I'2, I'3 on a high adjustable differential current set point, without tripping restraint
the other. an adjustable percentage-based characteristic with two slopes
It adjusts both the amplitude and phase of the currents a low adjustable differential current set point.
in each winding according to the vector shift and the Stability is ensured by the following tripping restraints:
transformer rated power, as well as the set voltage and a self-adaptive or conventional harmonic restraint
current values. a transformer-energization restraint
It then compares the matched currents phase by a CT-loss restraint.
3
phase. The high tripping set point is not restrained.
CT loss can result in a false differential current and nuisance tripping. This restraint
is activated if the following 3 criteria are met. The first two criteria identify the
potentially defective CT; the third confirms the CT loss.
DE52097
1) At least one differential current is in the tripping zone according to the bias
characteristic.
2) A residual current (SUM3I) is detected on a single winding.
A phase current measurement of this winding might be defective.
I1 + I2 + I3 > 0.3 × S I’1 + I’2 + I’3 > 0.3 × S
3 × Un1 3 × Un2
3) The magnitude of the positive sequence current is higher on the healthy
winding than on the faulty one.
4) On the faulty winding, abnormal number of zero value samples
( ix <0.02 × In) is measured on one phase and only one.
The restraint is disabled if one criterion is not met.
= Exclusive OR (XOR)
Block diagram
DE52173
SEPED303001EN 215
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
Definitions Matching
The terms winding 1 and winding 2 are used in the Principle
following manner: The currents in windings 1 and 2 cannot be compared directly due to the
b winding 1: corresponds to the circuit to which the transformation ratio and the phase displacement introduced by the power
main currents I1, I2, I3 and the voltage measurements transformer.
V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32 are connected Sepam does not use matching CTs. Sepam uses the rated power and winding
b winding 2: corresponds to the circuit to which the voltage data to calculate the transformation ratio and, therefore, to match current
additional currents I'1, I'2, I'3 are connected. amplitude. The vector shift is used to match the phase currents.
Notation
S: HV/LV transformer rated power
Un1: Winding 1 rated voltage
DE52176
216 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
I′ 1 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ I′ 1 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 1rec = --------- – ------------------------------------ I′ 1rec = – --------- + -------------------------------------
DE52028
DE52029
DE52028
DE52035
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
0 I′ 2 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ 6 I′ 2 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 2rec = --------- – ------------------------------------- I′ 2rec = – --------- + -------------------------------------
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
I′ 3 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ I′ 3 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 3rec = --------- – ------------------------------------- I′ 3rec = – --------- + -------------------------------------
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
I′ 1 – I′ 2 I′ 2 – I′ 1
I′ 1rec = ------------------------ I′ 1rec = ------------------------
DE52028
DE52030
DE52028
DE52036
3In2 3In2
1 I′ 2 – I′ 3 7 I′ 3 – I′ 2
I′ 2rec = ------------------------ I′ 2rec = ------------------------
3In2 3In2
I′ 3 – I′ 1
I′ 3rec = ------------------------
3In2
I′ 1 – I′ 3
I′ 3rec = ------------------------
3In2 3
I′ 2 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ I′ 2 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 1rec = – --------- + ----------------------------------- I′ 1rec = --------- – ------------------------------------
DE52028
DE52031
DE52028
DE52037
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
2 I′ 3 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ 8 I′ 3 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 2rec = – --------- + ----------------------------------- I′ 2rec = --------- – ------------------------------------
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
I′ 1 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ I′ 1 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 3rec = – --------- + ----------------------------------- I′ 3rec = --------- – ------------------------------------
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
I′ 3 – I′ 2 I′ 2 – I′ 3
I′ 1rec = ------------------------ I′ 1rec = ------------------------
DE52028
DE52032
DE52028
DE52038
3In2 3In2
3 I′ 1 – I′ 3 9 I′ 3 – I′ 1
I′ 2rec = ------------------------ I′ 2rec = ------------------------
3In2 3In2
I′ 2 – I′ 1 I′ 1 – I′ 2
I′ 3rec = ------------------------ I′ 3rec = ------------------------
3In2 3In2
I′ 3 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ I′ 3 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 1rec = --------- – ------------------------------------ I′ 1rec = – --------- + -----------------------------------
DE52028
DE52033
DE52028
DE52039
4 I′ 1 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ 3 10 I′ 1 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 2rec = --------- – -------------------------------------- I′ 2rec = – --------- + -----------------------------------
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
I′ 2 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′ I′ 2 I′ 1 + I′ 2 + I′
I′ 3rec = --------- – ------------------------------------ I′ 3rec = – --------- + -------------------------------------
In2 3In2 In2 3In2
I′ 3 – I′ 1 I′ 1 – I′ 3
I′ 1rec = ------------------------ I′ 1rec = ------------------------
DE52028
DE52034
DE52028
DE52040
3In2 3In2
5 I′ 1 – I′ 2 11 I′ 2 – I′ 1
I′ 2rec = ------------------------ I′ 2rec = ------------------------
3In2 3In2
I′ 2 – I′ 3 I′ 3 – I′ 2
I′ 3rec = ------------------------ I′ 3rec = ------------------------
3In2 3In2
Test mode
Two operating modes are available to facilitate maintenance and
startup operations:
b normal mode: the protection function controls the tripping and
indication outputs based on the settings.
This is the standard operating mode
b test mode: the protection function controls the tripping and
indication outputs based on the test mode settings.
This mode can only be accessed via the SFT2841 software, once it
has been connected and the Protection setting password entered.
The system returns to normal mode when the software is
disconnected.
Transfer from normal mode to test mode can result in nuisance
tripping if the protected transformer is energized.
Test mode settings:
S
b Un1 = ---------------------
In x 3
S
b Un2 = -----------------------
-
I′ n x 3
b vector shift = 0.
SEPED303001EN 217
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
DE52174
Self-adaptive restraint
Self-adaptive restraint is particularly suitable for transformers where the peak inrush
current in Amps is less than 8In1 or 8In2, depending on the winding by which the
transformer is energized.
This neuronal network restraint ensures stability in the event of an external fault by
analyzing the second- and fifth-harmonic factors, the differential currents and the
through currents.
It ensures stability:
b in the event of the transformer closing
b in the event of an asymmetrical fault outside the zone, which saturates the current
sensors
b in the event of the transformer being operated on a voltage supply, which is too
high (overfluxing).
Detecting the presence of harmonics and taking into account the through and
differential currents, the restraint automatically increases the low set point and the
percentage-based slopes.
It is also more sensitive than the high set point. There is therefore no point in using
the high set point when this restraint is active. Furthermore, as the restraint
integrates the stabilization slope for high through currents, which can saturate the
current sensors, slope Id/It2 does not have to be activated.
Conventional restraint
The conventional restraint comprises a second-harmonic set point for each phase
and a fifth-harmonic set point for each phase.
The second-harmonic set point ensures that the protection function will not pick up
in the event of the transformer closing or the current sensors becoming saturated.
The restraint can be global (cross-blocking: all three phases are restrained as soon
as the harmonic in one phase exceeds the set point) or phase-specific (no
cross-blocking: only the phase with a harmonic exceeding the set point is restrained).
Cross-blocking is recommended for transformers used in three-phase mode.
The fifth-harmonic set point ensures that the protection function will not pick up in the
event of the transformer being connected to a voltage supply, which is too high.
The restraint can be global (i.e., all three phases are restrained) or phase-specific
(only the phase with a harmonic exceeding the set point is restrained). Restraint
without cross-blocking is recommended for normal operation.
218 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
Restraint on closing
In some cases, the harmonic content of the transformer inrush current is not
sufficient to activate harmonic restraints. An additional restraint can be activated:
b when the through current exceeds an adjustable set point Isinr
b by an internal variable, P87T_1_118, controlled by logic equations or Logipam.
This restraint is applied to the percentage-based differential elements for an
adjustable time period T. It is not applied to the high set point.
DE52175
Restraint on CT loss
CT loss can distort the differential current and cause nuisance tripping. This restraint
detects a measurement dropping to zero abnormally by analyzing sampled
3
differential and through currents.
b Energization by winding 2:
v Inrush current depends on the transformer rated current:
SEPED303001EN 219
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
S
b Winding 2 end: 0.1 × --------------------------- S
≤I ′ n ≤2.5 × ---------------------------
Un2 × 3 Un2 × 3
Referring to standard IEC 60044-1, the composite error at the accuracy-limit current
is 5% for type 5P CTs. For the CTs specified according to class Px, the maximum
error is deemed to equal 5%.
The minimum set point for Ids is found by adding together the errors below:
The Ids low set point should therefore be set to the minimum value of 30%.
220 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
Referring to standard IEC 60044-1, the composite error at the accuracy-limit current
is 5% for type 5P CTs. For the CTs specified according to class Px, the maximum
error is deemed to equal 5%.
The minimum slope for Id/It is found by adding together the errors below:
( 100 – α). 100 -
b Measurement: 100 × 1 – -----------------------------------------------
( 100 + b ). ( 100 + β )
b Relay: 2%
b Safety margin: 5% 3
Example: Transformer equipped with a tap changer of -10%/+15%.
Using type 5P CTs, the error on the slope is:
Setting the second Id/It2 slope and the slope change point
The second slope on the percentage-based characteristic ensures sufficient stability
of the protection in the event of an external fault resulting in the current sensors
becoming saturated.
b The slope change point is set as a function of the value of the first Id/It slope and
the transformer inrush current.
3 4 ⁄ 3 ( Id ⁄ It )
( Slope change point ) ≤2 + -- ( ˆi inr ) . --------------------
4 100
SEPED303001EN 221
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
Characteristics
Settings
Low set point Ids
Setting range 30 % to 100 % of In1
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
Percentage-based characteristic Id/It
Setting range 15 % to 50 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
Percentage-based characteristic Id/It2
Setting range None, 50 % to 100 %
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Resolution 1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
222 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
Example 1
b The transformer is energized at the winding 1 end.
DE52099
Sensor selection
The rated currents of the windings are:
4MVA 4MVA
In1 = --------------------------- = 115.5 A and In2 = ------------------------ = 2310A
3 ⋅ 20kV 3 ⋅ 1kV
The sensor rated current is selected at the next highest standardized values:
In = 150 A and I'n = 3000 A.
Inrush current:
820
ˆi inr = -------------------
115.5 2
- = 5 : depending on the transformer rated current
3
820
ˆi inr ⁄ TC = ---------------
- = 3.9: depending on the CT rated current
150 2
b Winding 1 end, ˆi inr ⁄ TC < 6.7: type 5P20 current transformers are suitable.
b Winding 2 end, transformer not energized: type 5P20 current transformers are also
suitable.
Thus the second slope on the percentage-based curve and the high set point are not
necessary.
SEPED303001EN 223
Protection functions Transformer differential
ANSI code 87T
Example 2
b The transformer is energized at the winding 1 end.
DE52100
The sensor rated current is selected at the next highest standardized values:
In = 100 A and I'n = 3500 A.
Inrush current:
942
ˆi inr = ------------------
- = 9.6 : depending on the transformer rated current
69.4. 2
3 942
ˆi inr ⁄ TC = -----------------
100. 2
= 6.66: depending on the CT rated current
b Winding 1 end, ˆi inr ⁄ TC < 6.7: type 5P20 current transformers are suitable.
b Winding 2 end, transformer not energized: type 5P20 current transformers are also
suitable.
224 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions General
Tripping curves
MT10911
b timer hold.
Is I
Definite time protection principle.
IDMT protection
The operation time depends on the protected value (phase current, earth fault
current, etc.) in accordance with standards IEC 60255-3, BS 142 and IEEE C-37112.
Operation is represented by a characteristic curve, e.g.:
3
b t = f(I) curve for the phase overcurrent function
b t = f(I0) curve for the earth fault function.
The rest of the document is based on t = f(I); the reasoning may be extended to other
variables I0, etc.
The curve is defined by:
b its type (standard inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, etc.)
b current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve
b time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for I = 10 Is.
These 3 settings are made chronologically in the following order: type, Is current,
time delay T.
Changing the time delay T setting by x % changes all of the operation times in the
curve by x %.
type 1
t
DE50666
type 1,2
1 1,2 10 20 I/Is
IDMT protection principle.
The tripping time for I/Is values less than 1.2 depends on
the type of curve selected.
SEPED303001EN 225
Protection functions General
Tripping curves
RI curve
1 T
Equation: t d ( I ) = ----------------------------------------------------- × ------------------
⎛ I ⎞ – 1 3.1706
3 0.339 – 0.236 ----
⎝ I s⎠
IEEE curves
Equation Curve type Coefficient values
A B p β
Moderately inverse 0.010 0.023 0.02 0.241
⎛ ⎞ Very inverse 3.922 0.098 2 0.138
⎜ A ⎟ T
t d ( I ) = ⎜ ---------------------- + B⎟ × --- Extremely inverse 5.64 0.0243 2 0.081
⎜⎛ I ⎞ p ⎟ β
⎝ ⎝ ---- –1
I ⎠ ⎠
s
IAC curves
Equation Curve type Coefficient values
A B C D E β
Inverse 0.208 0.863 0.800 -0.418 0.195 0.297
Very inverse 0.090 0.795 0.100 -1.288 7.958 0.165
Extremely inverse 0.004 0.638 0.620 1.787 0.246 0.092
⎛ ⎞
⎜ B D E ⎟ T
t d ( I ) = ⎜A + ------------------- + ---------------------- + ----------------------⎟ x -----
⎜ ⎛---- – C⎞ ⎛---I- – C⎞
I 2
⎛---I- – C⎞ ⎟ β 3
⎝ ⎝I ⎠ ⎝I ⎠ ⎝I ⎠ ⎠
s s s
226 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions General
Tripping curves
Example.
Timer hold
The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for:
b detection of restriking faults (DT curve)
3
DE51630
DE50754
SEPED303001EN 227
Protection functions General
Tripping curves
MT10215
the curve. This setting is determined taking into tk
account the constraints involved in discrimination with T = Ts10 × ---------
tsk
the upstream and downstream protection devices.
The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of
tk k
point A on the operation curve (IA, tA), e.g. the point
that corresponds to the maximum fault current for the
1 Ik/Is 10 I/Is
Another practical method:
the table below gives the values of K = ts/ts10 as a function of I/Is.
In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay, read the value K = tsk/Ts10
on the line for Ik/Is.
The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve
passes through point k (Ik, tk) is: T = tk/k.
Example
Data:
b type of time delay: standard inverse time (SIT)
b set point: Is
b a point k on the operation curve: k (3.5 Is; 4 s)
Question: What is the time delay T setting (operation time at 10 Is)?
Reading the table: SIT column, line I/Is = 3.5 therefore K = 1.858
Answer: The time delay setting is T = 4/1.858 = 2.15 s
228 SEPED303001EN
Protection functions General
Tripping curves
Answer: The operation time for the current IA is t = 1.80 x 0.8 = 1.44 s.
tA
tsA
Ts10
T
3
1 IA/Is 10 I/Is
Table of K values
I/Is SIT VIT, LTI EIT UIT RI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE EI IAC I IAC VI IAC EI
and IEC/A and IEC/B and IEC/C (IEC/D) (IEC/E) (IEC/F)
1.0 ∞
(1)
∞ (1)
∞ (1)
— 3.062 ∞ ∞ ∞ 62.005 62.272 200.226
1.1 24.700 (1) 90.000 (1) 471.429 (1) — 2.534 22.461 136.228 330.606 19.033 45.678 122.172
1.2 12.901 45.000 225.000 545.905 2.216 11.777 65.390 157.946 9.413 34.628 82.899
1.5 5.788 18.000 79.200 179.548 1.736 5.336 23.479 55.791 3.891 17.539 36.687
2.0 3.376 9.000 33.000 67.691 1.427 3.152 10.199 23.421 2.524 7.932 16.178
2.5 2.548 6.000 18.857 35.490 1.290 2.402 6.133 13.512 2.056 4.676 9.566
3.0 2.121 4.500 12.375 21.608 1.212 2.016 4.270 8.970 1.792 3.249 6.541
3.5 1.858 3.600 8.800 14.382 1.161 1.777 3.242 6.465 1.617 2.509 4.872
4.0 1.676 3.000 6.600 10.169 1.126 1.613 2.610 4.924 1.491 2.076 3.839
4.5 1.543 2.571 5.143 7.513 1.101 1.492 2.191 3.903 1.396 1.800 3.146
5.0 1.441 2.250 4.125 5.742 1.081 1.399 1.898 3.190 1.321 1.610 2.653
5.5 1.359 2.000 3.385 4.507 1.065 1.325 1.686 2.671 1.261 1.473 2.288
6.0 1.292 1.800 2.829 3.616 1.053 1.264 1.526 2.281 1.211 1.370 2.007
6.5 1.236 1.636 2.400 2.954 1.042 1.213 1.402 1.981 1.170 1.289 1.786
7.0 1.188 1.500 2.063 2.450 1.033 1.170 1.305 1.744 1.135 1.224 1.607
7.5 1.146 1.385 1.792 2.060 1.026 1.132 1.228 1.555 1.105 1.171 1.460
8.0 1.110 1.286 1.571 1.751 1.019 1.099 1.164 1.400 1.078 1.126 1.337
8.5 1.078 1.200 1.390 1.504 1.013 1.070 1.112 1.273 1.055 1.087 1.233
9.0 1.049 1.125 1.238 1.303 1.008 1.044 1.068 1.166 1.035 1.054 1.144
9.5 1.023 1.059 1.109 1.137 1.004 1.021 1.031 1.077 1.016 1.026 1.067
10.0 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
10.5 0.979 0.947 0.906 0.885 0.996 0.981 0.973 0.934 0.985 0.977 0.941
11.0 0.959 0.900 0.825 0.787 0.993 0.963 0.950 0.877 0.972 0.957 0.888
11.5 0.941 0.857 0.754 0.704 0.990 0.947 0.929 0.828 0.960 0.939 0.841
12.0 0.925 0.818 0.692 0.633 0.988 0.932 0.912 0.784 0.949 0.922 0.799
12.5 0.910 0.783 0.638 0.572 0.985 0.918 0.896 0.746 0.938 0.907 0.761
13.0 0.895 0.750 0.589 0.518 0.983 0.905 0.882 0.712 0.929 0.893 0.727
13.5 0.882 0.720 0.546 0.471 0.981 0.893 0.870 0.682 0.920 0.880 0.695
14.0 0.870 0.692 0.508 0.430 0.979 0.882 0.858 0.655 0.912 0.868 0.667
14.5 0.858 0.667 0.473 0.394 0.977 0.871 0.849 0.631 0.905 0.857 0.641
15.0 0.847 0.643 0.442 0.362 0.976 0.861 0.840 0.609 0.898 0.846 0.616
15.5 0.836 0.621 0.414 0.334 0.974 0.852 0.831 0.589 0.891 0.837 0.594
16.0 0.827 0.600 0.388 0.308 0.973 0.843 0.824 0.571 0.885 0.828 0.573
16.5 0.817 0.581 0.365 0.285 0.971 0.834 0.817 0.555 0.879 0.819 0.554
17.0 0.808 0.563 0.344 0.265 0.970 0.826 0.811 0.540 0.874 0.811 0.536
17.5 0.800 0.545 0.324 0.246 0.969 0.819 0.806 0.527 0.869 0.804 0.519
18.0 0.792 0.529 0.307 0.229 0.968 0.812 0.801 0.514 0.864 0.797 0.504
18.5 0.784 0.514 0.290 0.214 0.967 0.805 0.796 0.503 0.860 0.790 0.489
19.0 0.777 0.500 0.275 0.200 0.966 0.798 0.792 0.492 0.855 0.784 0.475
19.5 0.770 0.486 0.261 0.188 0.965 0.792 0.788 0.482 0.851 0.778 0.463
20.0 0.763 0.474 0.248 0.176 0.964 0.786 0.784 0.473 0.848 0.772 0.450
(1) Values suitable only for IEC A, B and C curves.
SEPED303001EN 229
Protection functions General
Tripping curves
Standard inverse time SIT curve Extremely inverse time EIT curve
Very inverse time VIT or LTI curve Ultra inverse time UIT curve
RI curve
DE50869
DE50870
MT10207
1000,00
100,00
VI
100,00
MI EI
VI
10,00
EI
10,00
1,00
1,00
I/Is
0,10 I/Is 0,10
1 10 100 1 10 100
230 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Contents
functions
Description 232
Definition of symbols 233
Logic input / output assignment 234
Switchgear control 238
ANSI code 94/69 238
Capacitor bank switchgear control 244
ANSI code 94/69 244
Latching / acknowledgement 252
TC / switchgear position discrepancy
Tripping 253
Disturbance-recording trigger 254
Switching of groups of settings 256
Logic discrimination 257
Principle 257
S80, S81, T81, B80 and B83 applications 260
M81, M87, M88 and C86 applications
S82, S84, T82, T87, G82, G87 and G88 applications
261
262
4
Example of setting: radial network 264
Example of setting: parallel incomers 266
Example of setting: closed ring network 268
Load shedding 270
Restart 271
Generator shutdown and tripping 273
Genset shutdown 274
De-excitation 275
Example 276
Automatic transfer 277
Automatic "one out of two" transfer 279
Operation 279
Implementation 283
Characteristics 286
Automatic "two out of three" transfer 287
Operation 287
Implementation 292
Characteristics 296
Triggering the Motor start report (MSR) 297
Activating / Deactivating the Data log function (DLG) 298
Change of phase rotation direction 299
Local indication 300
ANSI code 30 300
Local control 303
Control matrix 306
Logic equations 308
Customized functions using Logipam 312
Self-tests and fail-safe position 313
SEPED303001EN 231
Control and monitoring Description
functions
Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical
network operation:
b the main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent
cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter
setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned.
b the predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular
needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
v logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring
functions
v creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
v creation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
v customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
LEDs and annunciation messages
b with the Logipam option, Sepam can provide the most varied control and
monitoring functions, programmed using the SFT2885 programming software that
implements the Logipam ladder language.
Operating principle
The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3
phases:
b acquisition of input data:
v results of protection function processing
v external logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input /
output module
v local control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
4 v remote control orders (TC) received via the communication link
b actual processing of the control and monitoring function
b utilization of the processing results:
v activation of output relays to control a device
v information sent to the facility manager:
- by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software
- by remote indication (TS) via the communication link
- by real-time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram.
The 5 outputs included in the Sepam series 80 base unit may be extended by adding
1, 2 or 3 MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6 output relays.
After the number of MES120 modules required for the needs of an application is set,
the logic inputs are assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which
covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs
within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for
undervoltage type operation.
A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses.
232 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Definition of symbols
functions
This page gives the meaning of the symbols Pulse mode operation
used in the block diagrams illustrating the b "on" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle) each time a signal
different control and monitoring functions in appears
this chapter.
DE50681
Logic functions
b "OR"
DE50675
Equation: S = X + Y + Z.
b "off" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle)
b "AND" each time a signal disappears.
DE50676
DE50682
Equation: S = X x Y x Z.
b exclusive "XOR"
4
DE50677
Equation: S = X (S = 1 if X = 0).
Delay timers
Two types of delay timers:
b "on" delay timer: used to delay the appearance of a
signal by a time T
Equation: B = S + R x B.
DE50679
SEPED303001EN 233
Control and monitoring Logic input / output assignment
functions
Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions
using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below.
The control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.
All the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for
the customization functions according to specific application needs:
b in the control matrix (SFT2841 software), to connect an input to a logic output, a
LED on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display
b in the logic equation editor (SFT2841 software), as logic equation variables
b in Logipam (SFT2885 software) as input variables for the program in ladder
language.
234 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic input / output assignment
functions
SEPED303001EN 235
Control and monitoring Logic input / output assignment
functions
Note: GOOSE IEC 61850 logic inputs/outputs can only be used with the ACE850TP or
ACE850FO communication interface and only with Sepam series 80.
236 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic input / output assignment
functions
I202
S8x, T8x, G8x, B8x
SEPED303001EN 237
Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
238 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Block diagram
Voluntary open orders:
b by logic input
DE80555
b by remote control
b by mimic-based UMI
Internal trip order
Internal trip orders: V_TRIPPED
b protection functions
b predefined control functions
b programmed functions
(logic equations or Logipam)
External trip orders:
b by logic inputs Ix or Gx
Switchgear closed
SEPED303001EN 239
Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Trip by AT:
V_AT_TRIPPING
V_2/3_TRIPPING
4 de-excitation (V_DE_EXCIT_ORD)
genset shutdown (V_SHUTDN_ORD)
240 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
The closing order is given if the close enable is received before the close request
delay runs out. When this is the case, the message "SYNC. OK" is displayed.
If the close enable is not received, the message "SYNC. FAILURE" is displayed.
When possible and if the MCS025 remote module is connected by the CCA785 cord
to the Sepam to which the close request has been made, an additional message
indicates the type of synchronization failure:
b "SYNC. FAILED dU" for too high a voltage difference
b "SYNC. FAILED dF" for too high a frequency difference
b "SYNC. FAILED dPhi" for too high a phase difference.
An additional delay is used to confirm the close enable to guarantee that the closing
conditions last long enough.
Block diagram
4
DE52273
SEPED303001EN 241
Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Parameter setting
The Switchgear control function is set up and adapted to match the type of breaking
device to be controlled using the SFT2841 software.
b choice of the type of breaking device to be controlled: circuit breaker (by default)
or contactor
b activation of the Synchro-check function, if necessary.
242 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Characteristics
Settings
Switchgear control
Setting range On / Off
Type of device
Setting range Circuit breaker / Contactor
Tripping pulse duration (output O1)
Setting range 200 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Closing with synchro-check
Setting range On / Off
Close request time delay Tdf
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Synchro confirmation time delay Tcs
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Tripping, opening V_TRIPCB b b
Inhibit closing
Closing
V_INHIBECLOSE
V_CLOSECB
b
b
b
b
4
Closing without synchro-check V_CLOSE_NOCTRL b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Switchgear control on V_SWCTRL_ON b
Tripping, opening V_TRIPPED b b b
Inhibit closing V_CLOSE_INHIBITED b b b
Closing V_CLOSED b b b
Contactor control V_CONTACTOR b b
Synchro-check on V_SYNC_ON b b
Sychrochecked close request in V_SYNC_INPROC b b
process
Synchrochecked close request stop V_SYNC_STOP b b
Synchrochecked close request V_SYNC_OK b b
successful
Synchrochecked close request V_NOSYNC b b
failure
Synchrochecked close request V_NOSYNC_DU b b
failure - Voltage difference too high
Synchrochecked close request V_NOSYNC_DF b b
failure - Frequency difference too
high
Synchrochecked close request V_NOSYNC_DPHI b b
failure - Phase difference too high
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 243
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
244 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Block diagram
DE52274
SEPED303001EN 245
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
4 switches. This order is maintained for a time T1, the time required for the staggered
opening of the capacitor step switches and the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker
opens after all the capacitor step switches to avoid breaking the capacitive current.
b Trip:
The protection functions (units configured to trip the circuit breaker and external
protection units) send a tripping order to the circuit breaker. After the circuit breaker
opens, an open order is sent to all the capacitor step switches at the same time.
Anti-pumping function
To prevent simultaneous breaking device open and close orders and to give priority
to open orders, breaker device close orders are of the pulse type
246 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Block diagram
DE80239
4
Tripping due
to protection
TS233
SEPED303001EN 247
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Manual control
When the "Manual capacitor step control" logic input is on, each step may be opened
and closed manually:
b locally by specific logic inputs (one open input and one close input per step)
b remotely by remote control.
248 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Block diagram
DE52277
SEPED303001EN 249
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
250 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Capacitor bank switchgear control
functions ANSI code 94/69
Characteristics
Settings
Switchgear control
Setting range On / Off
Type of device
Setting range Circuit breaker / Contactor
Tripping pulse duration (output O1)
Setting range 200 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Control of capacitor banks
Setting range On / Off
Staggered capacitor step opening time delay Techx (1 delay per step)
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Capacitor step discharge time delay Tdx (1 delay per step)
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Capacitor step open and close control pulse duration Timp
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution
Inputs
10 ms or 1 digit
4
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Tripping, opening V_TRIPCB b b
Inhibit closing V_INHIBECLOSE b b
Closing V_CLOSECB b b
Capacitor step 1 tripping V_TRIP_STP1 b
Capacitor step 2 tripping V_TRIP_STP2 b
Capacitor step 3 tripping V_TRIP_STP3 b
Capacitor step 4 tripping V_TRIP_STP4 b
Capacitor step 1 closing V_CLOSE_STP1 b
Capacitor step 2 closing V_CLOSE_STP2 b
Capacitor step 3 closing V_CLOSE_STP3 b
Capacitor step 4 closing V_CLOSE_STP4 b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Switchgear control on V_SWCTRL_ON b b
Tripping, opening V_TRIPPED b b b
Inhibit closing V_CLOSE_INHIBITED b b b
Closing V_CLOSED b b b
Contactor control V_CONTACTOR b b
Capacitor bank control on V_BANK_ON b b
Tripping of capacitor step 1 V_STP1_TRIPPING b b
Tripping of capacitor step 2 V_STP2_TRIPPING b b
Tripping of capacitor step 3 V_STP3_TRIPPING b b
Tripping of capacitor step 4 V_STP4_TRIPPING b b
Closing of capacitor step 1 V_STP1_CLOSING b b
Closing of capacitor step 2 V_STP2_CLOSING b b
Closing of capacitor step 3 V_STP3_CLOSING b b
Closing of capacitor step 4 V_STP4_CLOSING b b
Capacitor step 1 matching fault V_STP1_CTRLFLT b b
Capacitor step 2 matching fault V_STP2_CTRLFLT b b
Capacitor step 3 matching fault V_STP3_CTRLFLT b b
Capacitor step 4 matching fault V_STP4_CTRLFLT b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 251
Control and monitoring Latching / acknowledgement
functions
Operation
The tripping outputs of all the protection functions and all the logic inputs (Ix) may be
latched individually.
Logic outputs may not be latched. Logic outputs set up as pulse-type outputs
maintain pulse-type operation even when they are linked to latched data.
Latched data are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.
All latched data are acknowledged together, at the same time. Acknowledgement is
done:
b locally on the UMI using the key
b or remotely via a logic input, the SFT2841 software or via the communication link
b or by logic equation or Logipam.
The remote indication TS5 remains present after latching operations until
acknowledgement has taken place.
The Latching/acknowledgement function associated with the Switchgear control
function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 Lockout relay function.
Block diagram
Acknowledgement
DE80557
4 Reset by
remote control (TC3)
Inhibit remote
Reset requested
control
V_RESETORD
Reset by
SFT2841
External reset
by logic input
V_RESET
Characteristics
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Inhibition of UMI Reset key V_INHIB_RESET_LOCAL b b
Acknowledgement by logic V_RESET b b
equation or Logipam
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Reset requested V_RESET_ORD b
Acknowledgement by UMI V_KEY_RESET b
Reset key
252 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring TC / switchgear position
functions discrepancy
Tripping
Block diagram
DE80243
Characteristics
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
4
TC/ switchgear position V_TC/CBDISCREP b
discrepancy
Tripping
Description
The information can be accessed via remote indication TS233.
It indicates whether a Sepam internal or external protection has tripped.
SEPED303001EN 253
Control and monitoring Disturbance-recording trigger
functions
Operation
The recording of analog and logic signals may be triggered by different events,
dependent on the control matrix parameter setting or manual action:
b triggering by the grouping of all pick-up signals of the protection functions in
service
b triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions
b triggering by selected logic inputs
b triggering by selected Vx outputs (logic equations)
b manual triggering by a remote control order (TC20)
b manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool
b manual triggering by Logipam
b triggering by selected logic inputs (Gx) (if recording configured in SFT2841
software disturbance recording screen).
Block diagram
4
DE80558
Pick up
Manual
disturbance
recording trigger Disturbance
recording
trigger
V_OPG_TRIGGED
Inhibition of
disturbance
recording trigger
Validation of
disturbance
recording trigger
Disturbance
Manual recording
disturbance trigger inhibited
recording trigger V_OPG_INHIBITED
254 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Disturbance-recording trigger
functions
Characteristics
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Inhibits disturbance recording V_OPG_INHIBIT b
function
Validates disturbance recording V_OPG_VALID b
function
Manual trigger of disturbance V_OPG_MANUAL b
recording function
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Disturbance recording function V_OPG_TRIGGED b
triggered
Disturbance recording function V_OPG_INHIBITED b b
inhibited
Disturbance recording on V_OPG_ON b
SEPED303001EN 255
Control and monitoring Switching of groups of settings
functions
Operation
There are two groups of settings, group A / group B, for the phase overcurrent, earth
fault, directional phase overcurrent and directional earth fault protection functions.
Switching from one group of settings to another makes it possible to adapt the
protection characteristics to suit the electrical environment of the application (change
of earthing system, changeover to local power generation, ...). The switching of
settings is global and therefore applies to all the units of the protection functions
mentioned above.
The groups of settings switching mode is determined by parameter setting:
b switching according to the position of a logic input (0 = group A, 1 = group B)
b switching by remote control order (TC33, TC34)
b forced group A or group B.
DE50807 Block diagram
Characteristics
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Group of settings A active V_GROUPA b
Group of settings B active V_GROUPB b
256 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Principle
Operation
This function considerably reduces the tripping time of the circuit breakers closest to
the source and may be used for logic discrimination in closed ring networks.
It applies to the phase 50/51, directional phase overcurrent 67, earth fault 50N/51N
and directional earth fault 67N overcurrent protections, definite time and IDMT.
The sending of blocking signals lasts as long as it takes to clear the fault. If Sepam
gives a tripping order, they are interrupted after a time delay that takes account of the
breaking device operating time and the protection unit reset time. This system
guarantees safety in downgraded operating situations (faulty wiring or switchgear).
Example: Radial distribution with use of time- Example: Radial distribution with use of logic discrimination
4
based discrimination
DE50623
DE50809
T: protection setting time. As an approximation for definite time T: protection setting time. As an approximation for definite time curves, this is assumed to be
curves, this is assumed to be equal to the protection tripping equal to the protection tripping time.
time.
When a fault appears, the protection units that detect it inhibit the upstream
The upstream protection units are typically delayed by protection units. The protection unit furthest downstream trips since it is not blocked
0.3 s to give the downstream protection units time to by another protection unit. The delays are to be set in accordance with the device to
trip. When there are many levels of discrimination, the be protected.
fault clearing time at the source is long. In this example, if the fault clearing time for the protection unit furthest downstream
In this example, if the fault clearing time for the protection is Xs = 0.2 s, the fault clearing time at the source is T = Xs - 0.1 s = 0.1 s.
unit furthest downstream is Xs = 0.2 s, the fault clearing
time at the source is T = Xs + 0.9 s = 1.1 s.
SEPED303001EN 257
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Principle
Send
BSIG1 BSIG2
Reception
BSIG1 BSIG2
Reception
Logic discrimination using wired logic inputs and outputs (Ix and Ox)
The assignment of protection devices between the two discrimination groups is fixed
and cannot be modified. When logic discrimination is used, it is important to check
the concordance between the origin of the measurement and the logic discrimination
group to which the unit is assigned.
By default, a single logic discrimination group has the same measurement origin.
When several origins are possible, the main channels I1, I2, I3 and I0 are assigned
by default to the first group and the additional channels I'1, I'2, I'3 and I'0 to the
second.
Pilot wire test
The pilot wires may be tested using the output relay test function in the SFT2841
software.
258 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Principle
The first logic group is active if one of the following two conditions is fulfilled:
b blocking reception 1 is assigned to a GOOSE logic input (G401 by default), except
for Sepams used in motor applications where this input does not exist
b blocking send 1 is created by sending a GOOSE logic discrimination blocking
message over the Ethernet network.
The second logic group, when present in the application, is active if one of the
following two conditions is fulfilled:
b blocking reception 2 is assigned to a GOOSE logic input (G402 by default)
b blocking send 2 is created by sending a GOOSE logic discrimination blocking
message over the Ethernet network.
Reception
BSIG1 BSIG2
ACE850 4
Ethernet TCP/IP
SEPED303001EN 259
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions S80, S81, T81, B80 and B83
applications
Threshold assignment
Type of Unit number
protection Time-based Send logic Reception logic
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
50/51 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 2 - 1, 2 -
50N/51N 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 2 - 1, 2 -
67N(1) 2 1 - 1 -
(1) According to application.
Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Logic discrimination trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP (1)
Block diagram
4
DE80561
(4)
Circuit Breaker closed
(3)
(GOOSE
logic input Gx)
(1) By default.
(2) According to application.
(3) If using the ACE850 communication interface and a GOOSE logic input (IEC 61850).
(4) Condition ignored (always = 1) if no input is assigned to Circuit Breaker closed.
260 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions M81, M87, M88 and C86 applications
Threshold assignment
Type of Unit number
protection Time-based Send logic Reception logic
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
50/51 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 2 - - -
50N/51N 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 2 - - -
67N 2 1 - - -
Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Logic discrimination trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP b b (1)
Blocking send 1 V_LOGDSC_BL1 b b
Logic discrimination on V_LOGDSC_ON b
(1) Only if switchgear control is not in service.
Block diagram
4
DE51620
SEPED303001EN 261
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions S82, S84, T82, T87, G82, G87 and
G88 applications
Block diagram
DE81057
BSIG1
BSIG2
(1) By default.
(2) According to application.
(3) If using the ACE850 communication interface and a GOOSE logic input (IEC 61850).
(4) Condition ignored (always = 1) if no input is assigned to Circuit Breaker closed.
262 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions S82, S84, T82, T87, G82, G87 and
G88 applications
Threshold assignment
Type of Unit number
protection Time-based Send logic Reception logic
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
50/51 3, 4, 7, 8 1, 2 5, 6 1, 2 5, 6
50N/51N 3, 4, 7, 8 1, 2 5, 6 1, 2 5, 6
67 (1) - 1 2 1 2
67N (1) - 1 2 1 2
(1) According to application.
Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Logic discrimination trip V_LOGDSC_TRIP b b (1)
Blocking send 1 V_LOGDSC_BL1 b b
Blocking send 2 V_LOGDSC_BL2 b b
Logic discrimination on V_LOGDSC_ON b
(1) Only if switchgear control is not in service.
SEPED303001EN 263
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting: radial network
When a fault occurs in a radial network, the fault current flows through the circuit
between the source and the location of the fault:
b the protection units upstream from the fault are triggered
b the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered
b only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip.
Example of setting
A 20 kV installation, supplied by a transformer, comprises the main busbars which in
turn supply a feeder to a motor substation and a long feeder to a distant MV/LV
transformer. The installation is earthed via a resistor at the incoming transformer
neutral point, which limits to the current to about 10 Amps.
DE50814
264 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting: radial network
Based on a network coordination study, the installation relay settings are as follows:
b incomer: Sepam T81 (relay A)
v busbar fault thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T =0.1 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1:
- blocked by relays B and D
- blocking send 1 to high voltage relays
v backup thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.7 s (DT)
Time-based thresholds
b feeder to motor substation: Sepam S80 (relay B)
v busbar fault thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.1 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1:
- blocked by relays C1 and C2
- blocking send 1 to relay A
v backup thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.4 s (DT)
Time-based thresholds
b motor feeders:
b motor 1: Sepam M81 (relay C1)
v motor fault thresholds
50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.1 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1:
- blocking send 1 to relay B
b motor 2: Sepam M87 (relay C2)
v motor fault thresholds
4
- 50/51, 50N/51N: T = 0.1 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1: blocking send 1 to relay B
Measurement origin: I1, I2, I3
- 50/51 self-balancing differential scheme: T =0s (DT)
Time-based threshold
Measurement origin: I'1, I'2, I'3
b transformer feeder
v cable fault thresholds
50/51, 67N: T = 0.4 s (DT)
Logic discrimination group 1:
- these thresholds are set time-wise in relation to relay E
- blocking send 1 to relay A.
The logic input and output settings for all the relays concerned are:
b blocking reception 1 on I103
b blocking send 1 on O102
When using GOOSE logic inputs (IEC 61850), the input and output parameters are:
b blocking reception 1: Each Sepam should subscribe to the GOOSE blocking
message 1 gcbBasicGse (LDO/PTCR1/blklnd1) concerning it and then send this
blocking GOOSE message to a GOOSE logic input (G401 by default for BSIG1).
b blocking send 1: Each Sepam should generate a GOOSE blocking message
called GOOSE Control Block standard which contains BSIG1 (gcbBasicGse (LDO/
PTRC1/blklnd1)).
For more information, refer to the Sepam IEC 61850 communication user's manual,
reference SEPED306024EN.
SEPED303001EN 265
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting: parallel incomers
DE50815
To avoid both incomers tripping when a fault occurs upstream from one incomer, the
Example of setting
b logic input/output assignment:
v I104: blocking reception 2 - Do not assign any inputs to blocking reception 1
v O102: blocking send 1
b protection function 67 unit 1: tripping direction = line
v instantaneous output: blocking send 1
v delayed output: not blocked (no input assigned to blocking signal 1), circuit breaker
tripping on faults upstream from incomer
b protection function 50/51, unit 5:
v delayed output:
- blocked by protection 67, unit 1 if there is a fault upstream from the incomer
- not blocked for busbar faults
- blocked for feeder faults
b protection function 50/51, unit 3 as backup.
266 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting:
parallel incomers
b blocking send 2: Each Sepam needing to provide the BSIG2 data should generate
a GOOSE blocking send 2 message.
b blocking reception 2: Each Sepam needing the BSIG2 data should subscribe to
the GOOSE blocking send 2 message available over the Ethernet TCP/IP network,
then wire this GOOSE blocking message on a GOOSE logic input (G402 by default
for BSIG2). Do not assign the input to BSIG1.
b blocking send 1: Each Sepam needing to provide the BSIG1 data should generate
a GOOSE blocking send 1 message.
b blocking reception 1: Each Sepam needing the BSIG1 data should subscribe to
the GOOSE blocking send 1 message available over the Ethernet TCP/IP network,
then wire this GOOSE blocking message on a GOOSE logic input (G401 by default
for BSIG1).
SEPED303001EN 267
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
function Example of setting:
closed ring network
Closed ring network protection may be provided by Sepam S82 or T82, which include
the following functions:
b 2 units of directional phase (67) and earth fault (67N) protection functions:
v one unit to detect faults in the "line" direction
v one unit to detect faults in the "busbar" direction
b use of 2 discrimination groups:
v sending of 2 blocking signals, according to the detected fault direction
v reception of 2 blocking signals, to block the directional protection relays according
to the detection direction.
DE50816
With the combination of directional protection functions and the logic discrimination
function, the faulty section may be isolated with a minimal delay by tripping of the
circuit breakers on either side of the fault.
The instantaneous output of protection functions 67 and 67N, activated at 80% of the
Is threshold, is used to send blocking signals. This avoids uncertainty when the fault
current is close to the Is threshold.
268 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic discrimination
functions Example of setting:
closed ring network
Example of setting:
Case of a closed ring with 2 substations, each of which comprises 2 Sepam S82
relays, marked R11, R12 and R21, R22.
DE50817
Starting at one end of the ring, the detection direction of units 1 and 2 of the
directional protection functions should be alternated between line and busbars.
SEPED303001EN 269
Control and monitoring Load shedding
functions
Operation
Motor load shedding is done to reduce the load on the electrical network so as to
keep the voltage within an acceptable range.
Load shedding may be triggered:
b by an order from outside Sepam in the presence of a logic input assigned for the
reception of load shedding orders. Orders may be delayed
b by a voltage dip detected by the delayed output of Sepam 27D protection unit 1
(typical setting 40% Un).
Load shedding triggers:
b tripping by the switchgear control function
b inhibition of closing as long as the load shedding order is maintained.
The load shedding order is maintained as long as one of the following three
conditions is present:
b external order via logic input (Ix or Gx)
b positive sequence voltage less than load shedding voltage detected by 27D unit 1
threshold
b insufficient positive sequence voltage for a restart order to be given and detected
by the delayed 27D unit 2 threshold. The time delay for the detection of correct
voltage recovery must be shorter than the load shedding delay (27D unit 1) in order
for the load shedding order to be maintained correctly. This unit is also used by the
restart function.
The function may be validated by the switchgear closed and not racked out
conditions.
Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Delay before load shedding
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Load shedding order V_LOADSH_ORD b b
Load shedding on V_LOADSH_ON b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
270 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Restart
functions
Operation
With this function, motors can be automatically restarted after a shutdown triggered
by a voltage dip (load shedding).
The restart function is to be associated with the load shedding function It allows
staggered restarting of process motors, as long as the voltage dip that caused load
shedding was brief.
When tripping occurs due to a dip in the network supply voltage detected by 27D
protection unit 1, two situations are possible:
b the voltage dip lasts for a period longer than the maximum voltage dip duration:
tripping is final. External action is required for restart.
b the voltage dip lasts for a period shorter than the maximum dip duration: a restart
order is given. Delayed restart allows motor restart orders to be staggered to avoid
network overload.
The enabling of restart is detected after the delayed output of protection 27D unit 2
drops out. This threshold allows the return of voltage to be detected independently
with respect to the load shedding threshold. The typical setting is 50 % Un.
The restart order is given by the switchgear control function.
Block diagram
DE51608
Characteristics
Settings
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Maximum voltage dip duration
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Restart delay
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Restart order V_RESTARTING b
Restart on V_RESTART_ON b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
SEPED303001EN 271
Control and monitoring Restart
functions
272 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions
Sequential tripping
DE50636
This type of control function gives the following orders on after the other:
b a trip order to the generator coupling circuit breaker
b a delayed trip order to the excitation circuit breaker
b a delayed shutdown order to the prime mover.
This mode is reserved for certain machines.
Sepam enables these operating modes by combining:
b switchgear control for tripping of the generator coupling circuit breaker
b de-excitation function for tripping of the excitation circuit breaker
b genset shutdown function to order the shutdown of the prime mover.
Function output delays are used for sequential tripping.
SEPED303001EN 273
Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions Genset shutdown
DE51609
b mechanical shutdown by shutting down the prime
mover
b electrical shutdown by tripping the generator.
Genset shutdown may be initiated in the following
ways:
b by a external shutdown order
v remote control order if enabled
v logic input if set up
b by logic equation or by Logipam to take into account
all specific generator installation characteristics
b by delayed protection functions.
274 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions De-excitation
DE51610
fault when the generator is disconnected from the
network:
b de-excitation of the generator
b electrical shutdown by tripping.
De-excitation may be initiated in the following ways:
b by an order
v remote control order if enabled
v logic input if set up
b by logic equation or by Logipam to take into account
all specific generator installation characteristics
b by delayed protection functions.
SEPED303001EN 275
Control and monitoring Generator shutdown and tripping
functions Example
Installation description
The electrical installation consists of busbars to which the following are connected:
b an incomer supplied by a 10 MVA transformer
b a 3.15 MVA power generator
DE51602
4 In normal operation, the generator and transformer are coupled to the busbars. The
generator provides backup power to the installation in the absence of the transformer
power supply. The installation is earthed by a neutral point coil connected to the
busbars. When the generator is not coupled to the network, its neutral is isolated.
When faults occur, the generator is over-excited for 3 seconds. Its fault current is
equal to 3 times its rated current. After the 3 seconds have elapsed, the fault current
drops to 0.5 times the rated current.
The generator is protected:
b against network electrical short-circuits by a phase overcurrent protection function
50/51 and a backup protection function 50V/51V
b against internal faults in generators by a generator differential protection function
87M.
b against earth faults by an earth fault protection function 50N/51N when the
generator is coupled to the busbars and by a neutral voltage displacement protection
function when it is not coupled
b against overloads by a thermal overload protection function 49RMS
b against unbalance by a negative sequence / unbalance protection function 46
b against frequency variations by underfrequency and overfrequency protection
functions 81L and 81H
b against voltage variations by undervoltage and overvoltage protection functions 27
and 59
b against field loss by a protection function 40
b against loss of synchronization of the main network by a protection function 78PS.
276 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic transfer
functions
Description
The automatic transfer function is used to transfer busbar supply from one source to
DE51498
another.
The function reduces busbar supply interruptions, thereby increasing the service
continuity of the network supplied by the busbars.
type of substation:
b automatic "one out of two" transfer is suitable for dual-incomer substations without
coupling
b automatic "two out of three" transfer is suitable for dual-incomer substations with
coupling.
These two applications are described separately to make them easier to understand.
SEPED303001EN 277
Control and monitoring Automatic transfer
functions
Equipment used
DE51499
For busbars with motors, it is necessary to check the remanent voltage on the
busbars during automatic transfer.
2 solutions are proposed:
b protection of the two incomers with Sepam B80:
v to measure the 3 phase voltages upstream of the circuit breaker and detect the
loss of phase voltage
v to measure 1 additional phase voltage on the busbars and detect the presence of
Automatic "two out of three" transfer with synchro-check remanent voltage
managed by Sepam B80.
b protection of the two incomers with another type of Sepam series 80, and checking
of remanent voltage on the busbars with Sepam B21.
278 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation
Definition
Automatic "one out of two" transfer is suitable for substations with busbars supplied
by two incomers with no coupling.
Automatic transfer comprises two functions:
b automatic transfer with busbar supply interruption
b voluntary return to normal without busbar supply interruption.
The 2 functions are described separately below.
Description
The function is used to transfer busbar supply from one source to the other, after the
detection of voltage loss or a fault upstream of the source.
SEPED303001EN 279
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation
Block diagram
DE51584
280 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation
Description
The voluntary return to normal without interruption involves two separate control
functions:
b closing of the open incoming circuit breaker, with or without synchro-check:
the two incoming circuit breakers are closed
b then opening of the normally open circuit breaker, designated by the "NO circuit
breaker" selector.
These two functions may also be used to transfer the busbar supply source without
any interruption.
Description
Circuit breaker closing is ensured by the Switchgear control function, with or without
synchro-check.
The AT function checks that all the required conditions are met and indicates to the
user that the return to normal is possible.
Block diagram
DE52253
SEPED303001EN 281
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Operation
Description
This function controls the opening of the circuit breaker designated as being normally
open by the position of the "NO circuit breaker" selector, when the two incomer
circuit breakers are closed.
It guarantees, for all the automatic control sequences that put the two sources in
parallel, that at the end of the transfer, only one circuit breaker out of the two is
closed.
The open order is taken into account by the Switchgear control function.
Block diagram
DE51586
282 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Implementation
Connection
DE51600
: optional wiring.
SEPED303001EN 283
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Implementation
4 Phase overcurrent
(ANSI 50/51)
Unit 1, instantaneous output
Detection of downstream
phase fault, to inhibit
automatic transfer.
To be set according to
discrimination study (the most
sensitive set point).
Earth fault (ANSI 50N/51N) Detection of downstream earth To be set according to
Unit 1, instantaneous output fault, to inhibit automatic discrimination study (the most
transfer. sensitive set point).
Phase overvoltage (ANSI 59) Detection of phase voltage Voltage set point: 90% Unp
Unit 1 upstream of the circuit Delay: 3 s
breaker.
To be assigned to a Sepam
logic output in the control
matrix.
Optional Use Setting information
protection functions
Remanent undervoltage Detection of no remanent Voltage set point: 30% Unp
(ANSI 27R) voltage on the busbars to Delay: 100 ms
Unit 1 which the motors are
connected.
284 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Implementation
SFT2841: standard assignment of the inputs required for the The predefined outputs associated with the AT function are as follows:
AT function.
"Protection" button Description Use
59 - 1 Delayed output of the Phase Indication for the opposite side
overvoltage function (ANSI 59) Sepam: the voltage is OK
Unit 1 upstream of the incoming
circuit breaker.
"Logic" button Description Use
NO circuit breaker closing Predefined output Automatic closing order of
V_CLOSE_NO_ORD opposite side circuit breaker.
SEPED303001EN 285
Control and monitoring Automatic "one out of two"
functions transfer
Characteristics
Setting
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Voltage return time
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Normal coupling position
Setting range No coupling / Normally open / Normally closed
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Transfer order on fault V_TRANS_ON_FLT b b
Transfer off order V_TRANS_STOP b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Automatic transfer on V_TRANSF_ON b b
Tripping by 2/3 or 1/2 logic V_2/3_TRIPPING b b
Tripping by automatic V_AT_TRIPPING b b
transfer
NO circuit breaker closing V_CLOSE_NO_ORD b b
Breaker closing ready V_CLOSE_EN b b
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
286 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation
Definition
Automatic "two out of three" transfer is suitable for substations with busbars supplied
by two incomers and with coupling.
Automatic transfer comprises two functions:
b automatic transfer with busbar supply interruption
b voluntary return to normal without busbar supply interruption.
The 2 functions are described separately below.
Description
The function is used to transfer busbar supply from one source to the other, after the
detection of voltage loss or a fault upstream of the source.
Automatic transfer with normally open coupling. Automatic source transfer takes place in two steps:
b tripping of the circuit breaker triggered by the detection of the loss of voltage or an
external trip order (trip order from upstream protection units): loss of busbar supply
b closing of the normally open circuit breaker to resupply the busbars. According to
the parameter setting, the normally open circuit breaker may be one of the following:
DE51514
Initialization of transfer
Three events may trigger automatic transfer:
b loss of voltage detected on the incomer by the Phase undervoltage function
(ANSI 27)
b or the detection of a fault by the protection units upstream of the incomer, with
intertripping order on the "External tripping 1" logic input
b or V_TRANS_ON_FLT, initialization of transfer by logic equations or by Logipam.
SEPED303001EN 287
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation
Block diagram
DE52289
288 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation
Description
The voluntary return to normal without interruption involves two separate control
functions:
b closing of the open circuit breaker, with or without synchro-check: the 3 circuit
Voluntary return to normal with normally closed coupling. breakers are closed
b then opening of the normally open circuit breaker, designated by the "NO circuit
breaker" selector.
These two functions may also be used to transfer the busbar supply source without
any interruption.
Description
Circuit breaker closing is ensured by the Switchgear control function, with or without
synchro-check.
The AT function checks that all the required conditions are met and indicates to the
user that the return to normal is possible.
Block diagram
DE80146
U ,delayed
V_TRANS_V_EN u1
SEPED303001EN 289
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation
Description
This function controls the opening of the circuit breaker designated as being normally
open by the position of the "NO circuit breaker" selector, when the three circuit
breakers are closed.
Normally closed coupling. It guarantees, for all the automatic control sequences that put the two sources in
parallel, that at the end of the transfer, only two circuit breakers out of the three are
closed.
The open order is taken into account by the Switchgear control function.
290 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Operation
Coupling closing
Description
The voluntary closing of the coupling circuit breaker without interruption involves two
separate control functions:
b closing of the coupling circuit breaker, with or without synchro-check: the 3 circuit
breakers are closed
b then opening of the normally open circuit breaker, designated by the "NO circuit
breaker" selector.
Block diagram
DE52257
SEPED303001EN 291
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation
: optional wiring.
292 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation
: optional wiring.
SEPED303001EN 293
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation
294 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Implementation
SFT2841: standard assignment of the inputs required for the The predefined outputs associated with the AT function are as follows:
AT function.
"Protection" button Description Use
59 - 1 Delayed output of the Phase Indication for the opposite side
overvoltage function (ANSI 59) Sepam: voltage OK upstream
Unit 1 of the incoming circuit breaker.
"Logic" button Description Use
NO circuit breaker closing Predefined output Automatic closing order of
V_CLOSE_NO_ORD normally open circuit breaker.
of the AT function
Coupling closing Predefined output
V_TIE_CLOSING
Coupling circuit breaker close
order.
4
of the AT function
Coupling tripping Predefined output Coupling circuit breaker open
V_TIE_OPENING order.
of the AT function
Breaker closing ready Predefined output LED indication: the return to
V_CLOSE_EN normal conditions are met.
of the AT function (neglecting the synchro-
check)
Coupling closing ready Predefined output LED indication: the coupling
V_TIE_CLOSE_EN close conditions are met.
of the AT function (neglecting the synchro-
check)
SEPED303001EN 295
Control and monitoring Automatic "two out of three"
functions transfer
Characteristics
Setting
Activity
Setting range On / Off
Voltage return time
Setting range 0 to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Normal coupling position
Setting range No coupling / Normally open / Normally closed
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam
Transfer order on fault V_TRANS_ON_FLT b b
Transfer off order V_TRANS_STOP b b
Voltage OK upstream of the V_TRANS _ V_EN b
incoming circuit breaker
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Automatic transfer on V_TRANSF_ON b
Tripping by 2/3 or 1/2 logic V_2/3_TRIPPING b b
Tripping by automatic V_AT_TRIPPING b b
transfer
NO circuit breaker closing V_CLOSE_NO_ORD b b
Breaker closing ready V_CLOSE_EN b b
b b
4 Coupling tripping
Coupling closing ready
Coupling closing
V_TIE_OPENING
V_TIE_CLOSE_EN
V_TIE_CLOSING
b
b
b
b
Coupling closing with V_TIESYNCFAIL b b
synchro-check failed
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
296 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Triggering the Motor start report
functions (MSR)
Operation
This function is only found in motor applications. It is used to record values specific
to motors, during the starting phase.
While there is no recording in progress, recording can be triggered by:
b the "starting in progress" output of the 48/51LR protection function
b the V_MSR_START output from the Logipam or the logic equation editor
b the remote control order TC51
b the "Trigger MSR" logic input
b the "Trigger MSR" GOOSE logic input
Block diagram
DE81267
MSR on 0 T
TS128
Closed circuit
& MSR in progress
breaker position
V_MSR_TRIGGED
Starting in progress
4
P48/51LR_1_22
Trigger MSR
V_MSR_START
TC 51 / trigg. MSR
≥1
Inhibit TC &
Trigger MSR
Logic input Ixxx
Trigger MSR
GOOSE Gxxx
Characteristics
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Trigger MSR V_MSR_START b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
MSR triggered V_MSR_TRIGGED b b
SEPED303001EN 297
Control and monitoring Activating / Deactivating the Data
functions log function (DLG)
Operation
This function is found in all applications.
Depending on the chosen parameter setting, activation and deactivating the log of
selected electrical values can be achieved by:
b logic input or GOOSE type IEC 61850 logic input
b Logipam or logic equation editor
b remote control order
b SFT2841 software.
Block diagram
DLG activation logic input
DE81268
≥1
DLG activation GOOSE input
0
DLG deactivation
by SFT2841
≥1
End of DLG log
DLG activation
V_DLG_START
Characteristics
Inputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
DLG activation V_DLG_START b b
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
DLG in progress V_DLG_ACTIVED b b
298 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Change of phase rotation direction
functions
Operation
This function is found in all applications.
The change of phase rotation direction can be triggered by:
b logic input or GOOSE type IEC 61850 logic input
b remote control order (TC)
The phase rotation direction can be defined as:
b positive sequence (123)
b negative sequence (132)
Block diagram
Logic input Rotation direction 123 activated
Rotation direction 123
DE81269
≥1 V_PHASE_DIR
GOOSE input
Rotation direction 123
0 takes priority
Rotation direction 123 TC54 &
1
1 takes priority Phase rotation direction active
&
Inhibit TC V_PHASE_ACTIVE
1 0
&
0
&
Rotation direction 132 TC55
0
SFT2841 selection
1
1 Discrepancy in
rotation direction 123
rotation direction 132
the phase rotation
direction command
4
rotation direction by TC & T=2s TS239
Logic input
Rotation direction 132 Logic & GOOSE inputs
Rotation direction 1xx not assigned
≥1
GOOSE input
rotation direction 132
Characteristics
Outputs
Designation Syntax Equations Logipam Matrix
Discrepancy in the phase rotation V_PHASE_DISC b b
direction
Phase rotation direction 123 V_PHASE_DIR b b
activated
Phase rotation direction 132 V_PHASE_INV b b
activated
Phase rotation direction active V_PHASE_ACTIVE b b
WARNING
WARNING: protection functions inhibited for 350 ms.
Form the time it receives the change phase rotation direction request, Sepam
cannot protect the electrical network for 350 ms.
This inhibition of protection functions can result in death or serious injury.
SEPED303001EN 299
Control and monitoring Local indication
functions ANSI code 30
Operation
Events may be indicated locally on the front panel of Sepam by:
b appearance of a message on the display
b switching on of one of the 9 yellow LEDs.
4 Thermostat alarm
Pressure trip
THERMOST. ALARM
PRESSURE TRIP
THERMOT.ALARME
PRESSION DECLT
Pressure alarm PRESSURE ALARM PRESSION ALARME
Thermistor alarm THERMISTOR AL. THERMISTOR AL.
Thermistor trip THERMISTOR TRIP THERMISTOR DECL.
Control fault CONTROL FAULT DEFAUT COMMANDE
Load shedding LOAD SHEDDING DÉLESTAGE
Genset shutdown GENSET SHUTDOWN ARRÊT GROUPE
De-excitation DE-EXCITATION DÉSEXCITATION
Tripping order by automatic transfer AUTO TRANSFER AUTO TRANSFER
Phase rotation direction command ROTATION DISC CMD DISC CDE ROTATION
complementarity fault
Diagnosis ANSI code
SF6 fault SF6 LOW BAISSE SF6
MET148-2 No 1 RTD fault RTD’S FAULT MET1 (1) DEF SONDE MET1 (1)
MET148-2 No 2 RTD fault RTD’S FAULT MET2 (1) DEF. SONDE MET2 (1)
VT supervision 60FL Phase VT supervision VT FAULT DEFAUT TP
Residual VT supervision VT FAULT Vo DEFAUT TP Vo
CT supervision 60 Main CT supervision CT FAULT DEFAUT TC
Additional CT supervision CT’ FAULT DEFAUT TC'
Trip circuit supervision (TCS) fault or 74 TRIP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DECLT
mismatching of open/closed position contacts
Closing circuit fault CLOSE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT ENCLT
Capacitor step matching fault COMP. FLT. STP (1 to 4) DEF. COMP. GR (1 à 4)
Cumulative breaking current monitoring ΣI²BREAKING >> ΣI² COUPES
Battery monitoring BATTERY LOW (1) PILE FAIBLE (1)
Auxiliary power supply monitoring Low threshold LOW POWER SUP. ALIM. SEUIL BAS
High threshold HIGH POWER SUP. ALIM. SEUIL HAUT
(1) RTD FAULT, BATTERY LOW messages: refer to the maintenance chapter.
300 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Local indication
functions ANSI code 30
SEPED303001EN - 301
Control and monitoring Local indication
functions ANSI code 30
LED indication
The 9 yellow LEDs on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following
events:
LED Event Name on label
on front panel
LED 1 Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 1 I>51
LED 2 Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 2 I>>51
LED 3 Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 1 Io > 51N
LED 4 Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 2 Io >> 51N
LED 5 Ext
LED 6
LED 7 Circuit breaker open (I102) 0 Off
LED 8 Circuit breaker closed (I101) I On
LED 9 Tripping by circuit breaker control Trip
The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software:
b LEDs are assigned to events in the "LEDs" tab of the control matrix screen
b editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the general
characteristics screen.
302 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Local control
functions
Description
Switchgear may be controlled locally using Sepam series 80 units equipped with the
PE80330
mimic-based UMI.
The control functions available are:
b selection of the Sepam control mode
b viewing of device status on the animated mimic diagram
b local control of the opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam
In Remote mode:
b remote control orders are taken into account
b local control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit breaker open
order.
Local control using the mimic-based UMI Remote mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_REMOTE = 1.
In Local mode:
b remote control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit breaker open
order.
b local control orders are enabled.
Local mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_LOCAL = 1.
Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventive 4
maintenance operations:
b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode
b no time-tagged events are sent by the communication link.
Test mode is indicated by the variable V_MIMIC_TEST = 1.
The symbols making up the mimic-diagram constitute the interface between the
mimic-based UMI and the other Sepam control functions.
There are three types of symbols:
b fixed symbol: represents the electrotechnical devices that are neither animated or
controlled, e.g. a transformer
b animated symbol with one or two inputs: represents the electrotechnical devices
that change on the mimic diagram, depending on the symbol inputs, but cannot be
controlled via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.
This type of symbol is used for switch-disconnectors without remote control, for
example.
b controlled symbol with one or two inputs/outputs: represents the electrotechnical
devices that change on the mimic diagram, depending on the symbol inputs, and can
be controlled via the Sepam mimic-based UMI.
This type of symbol is used for circuit breakers, for example.
The symbol outputs are used to control the electrotechnical device:
v directly via the Sepam logic outputs
v by the switchgear control function
v by logic equations or the Logipam program.
SEPED303001EN 303
Control and monitoring Local control
functions
Symbol animation
Depending on the value of their inputs, symbols change. A graphic representation
corresponds to each state. Animation is carried out automatically by changing the
symbol each time the state changes.
The symbol inputs must be assigned directly to the Sepam inputs indicating the
position of the symbolized switchgear.
Input = 1 Active
Inhibition of orders
"Controlled - 1 input/output" and "Controlled - 2 inputs/outputs" symbols have two
inhibition inputs that, when set to 1, block opening and closing orders. This makes it
possible to create interlocking systems or other order-disabling systems that are
taken into account by the UMI.
304 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Local control
functions
Symbol inputs/outputs
Depending on the desired operation of the mimic-based UMI, Sepam variables must
be assigned to the inputs of animated symbols and the inputs/outputs of controlled
symbols.
Block diagram
The block diagrams below present the functions ensured by the controlled symbols,
based on two examples.
4
Voluntary user control orders (selection of the device to be controlled in the mimic
diagram and action on a control key) are represented in the block diagrams by the
following icons:
: open order
: close order
DE51591
DE51592
SEPED303001EN 305
Control and monitoring Control matrix
functions
Description
The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and LEDs
to data produced by the protection functions, control logic and logic inputs.
Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected.
The matrix may also be used to display the alarms associated with the data.
It guarantees the consistency of the parameter setting with the predefined functions.
The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the
SFT2841 software tool.
306 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Control matrix
functions
SEPED303001EN 307
Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions
Example:
V1 = P5051_2_3 OR I102.
The variable V1 is assigned the result of the logic OR operation involving the value
from protection function 50/51 and logic input I102.
The variables may be used for other operations or as outputs to produce actions in
the control matrix, protection functions or predefined control and monitoring
functions.
A program is a series of lines executed sequentially every 14 ms.
A data input assistance tool provides quick access to each of the equation editor
operators and variables.
Description of operations
Operators
SFT2841: logic equation editor. b =: assignment of a result
V2 = VL3 //V2 is assigned the value of VL3
b NOT: logic inversion
PE50461
VL1 = NOT VL2 // VL1 is assigned the opposite logic state of VL2
b OR: logic OR
V1 = VL3 OR I103 // V1 is assigned state 1 if VL3 or I03 are in state 1
b AND: logic AND
VV3 = VL2 AND VV1 // VV3 is assigned state 1 if VL2 and VV3 are in state 1
b XOR: exclusive OR
V3 = VL1 XOR VL2 // V3 is assigned state 1 if only one of the variables VL1 or VL2
is in state 1.
This is equivalent to V3 = (V1 AND (NOT V2)) OR (V2 AND (NOT V1))
b //: commentary
The characters on the right are not processed
b (,): the operations may be grouped between brackets to indicate the order in which
they are carried out
V1 = (VL3 OR VL2) AND I213.
SFT2841: data input assistance tool.
308 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions
Functions
b x = SR(y, z): bistable with priority to Set
x is set to 1 when y is equal to 1
x is set to 0 when z is equal to 1 (and y is equal to 0)
otherwise x is not changed.
V1 = SR(I104, I105) // I104 sets V1 to 1, I105 sets V1 to 0
b LATCH(x, y, …): latching of variables x, y, ...
The variables are maintained constantly at 1 after being initially set. They are reset
to 0 when Sepam is reset (reset button, external input or remote control order).
The LATCH function accepts as many parameters as the number of variables that
the user wishes to latch.
It applies to the entire program, whatever the position of LATCH in the program. For
easier reading, it is advisable to put it at the start of the program.
LATCH(V1, VL2, VV3) // V1, VL2 and VV3 are latched, ie. once they are set to 1,
only a Sepam reset can set them back to 0
b x = TON(y, t): "on" delay timer
The variable x goes to 1 t ms after variable y goes to 1.
DE50621
x = TON(y, t).
SEPED303001EN 309
Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions
Input variables
Type Syntax Example, meaning
Logic inputs Ixxx I101: input 1 of MES120 No 1 module
I312: input 12 of MES120 No 3 module
Protection function outputs Pnnnn_x_y P50/51_2_1: Protection 50/51, unit 2, delayed output.
nnnn: ANSI code The protection function output data numbers are given in the
x: unit characteristics of each function and may be accessed using the
y: data data input assistance tool.
Remote control orders TC1 to TC64 Pulse type value (duration of one 14 ms cycle) of remote control
orders received
Predefined control function outputs V_TRIPPED Tripping order present at switchgear control function output
V_CLOSE_INHIBITED Inhibit closing order present at switchgear control function output
V_CLOSED Closing order present at switchgear control function output
Phase rotation direction management functions output V_PHASE_DIR The phase rotation direction 123 command is active
V_PHASE_INV The phase rotation direction 132 command is active
V_PHASE_DISC The phase rotation direction commands are not complementary
after more than 2 s
Mimic-based UMI outputs V_MIMIC_OUT_1 to Variables that may be assigned to the mimic diagram symbol
V_MIMIC_OUT_16 outputs and that change values when control orders are
transmitted from the mimic-based UMI
V_MIMIC_LOCAL Position of the key on the mimic-based UMI
V_MIMIC_TEST,
V_MIMIC_REMOTE
Output variables
Type Syntax Example, meaning
4 Outputs to matrix
Protection function inputs
V1 to V20
Pnnnn_x_y
nnn: ANSI code
They may initiate LEDs, logic outputs or messages in the matrix.
P50N/51N_6_113: Protection 50N/51N, unit 6, inhibit order.
The protection function output data numbers are given in the
x: unit characteristics of each function and may be accessed using the
y: data data input assistance tool.
Predefined control function inputs V_TRIPCB Tripping of circuit breaker (contactor) by the switchgear control
function. Used to adapt tripping and recloser activation conditions.
V_INHIBCLOSE Inhibition of circuit breaker (contactor) closing by the switchgear
control function. Used to add circuit breaker (contactor) inhibit
closing conditions.
V_CLOSECB Closing of circuit breaker (contactor) by the switchgear control
function. Used to generate a circuit breaker (contactor) close order
based on a particular condition.
V_SHUTDOWN Shutdown of genset prime mover. Used to adapt cases of genset
shutdown
V_DE_EXCITATION Generator de-excitation
Used to adapt cases requiring generator de-excitation
V_FLAGREC Data saved in disturbance recording.
Used to save a specific logic state in addition to those already
present in disturbance recording.
V_RESET Sepam reset
V_CLEAR Clearing of alarms present
V_INHIBIT_RESET_LOCAL Inhibition of Sepam reset by UMI Reset key.
V_CLOSE_NOCTRL Breaking device closing enabled without synchro-check.
Used to adapt the Switchgear control function
V_TRIP_STP1 to Tripping of capacitor steps 1 to 4.
V_TRIP_STP4 Used to adapt the Capacitor step control function
V_CLOSE_STP1 to Closing of capacitor steps 1 to 4.
V_CLOSE_STP4 Used to adapt the Capacitor step control function
V_TRANS_ON_FLT Automatic transfer order on fault.
Used to adapt automatic transfer
V_TRANS_STOP Stopping automatic transfer
Used to adapt automatic transfer
V_DLG_START Data log function activation
V_MSR_START Start an MSR
Local variables, constants
Type Syntax Example, meaning
Local variables stored VL1 to VL31 The values of these variables are saved in the event of an auxiliary
power outage and are restored when Sepam starts again.
Local variables not stored VV1 to VV31 The values of these variables are not saved in the event of an
auxiliary power outage. They are assigned the value of 0 when
Sepam starts.
Constants K_1, K_0 Value not modifiable
K_1: always 1
K_0: always 0
310 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Logic equations
functions
Examples of applications
b latching of recloser permanent trip signal
By default, this signal is of the pulse type at the recloser output. If required by
operating conditions, it may be latched as follows:
4
LATCH (V1) // V1 may be latched
V1 = P79_1_204 // recloser "permanent trip" output.
V1 may then control a LED or output relay in the matrix.
b latching of a LED without latching the protection function
Certain operating conditions call for the latching of indications on the front panel of
Sepam, without latching of the tripping output O1.
LATCH (V1, V2) // V1 and V2 may be latched
V1 = P50/51_1_1 OR P50/51_3_1 // tripping, units 1 and 3 of protection 50/51
V2 = P50/51_2_1 OR P50/51_4_1 // tripping, units 2 and 4 of protection 50/51
V1 and V2 must be configured in the matrix to control 2 front panel LEDs.
b circuit breaker tripping if input I113 is present for more than 300 ms
V_TRIPCB = TON (I113, 300).
b live line work (example 1)
If work is underway with power on (indicated by input I205), the relay behavior is to
be changed as follows:
1 – circuit breaker tripping by the instantaneous output of protection 50/51 unit 1 or
50N/51N unit 1 AND if input I205 is present:
V_TRIPCB = (P50/51_1_1 OR P50N/51N_1_1) AND I205
2 – Inhibit recloser:
P79_1_113 = I205
b live line work (example 2)
The user wishes to inhibit protection functions 50N/51N and 46 by an input I204:
P50N/51N_1_113 = I204
P46_1_113 = I204
b validation of a 50N/51N protection function by logic input I210
A 50N/51N protection function with a very low threshold must only initiate tripping of
the circuit breaker if it is validated by an input. The input comes from a relay which
gives a very accurate measurement of the neutral point current:
V_TRIPCB = P50N/51N_1_3 AND I210
b inhibition of circuit breaker closing if thermal alarm thresholds are overrun
The temperature protection function 38/49T supplies 16 alarm bits. If one of the first
three bits is activated (1 state), the user wishes to inhibit circuit breaker closing
V_INHIBCLOSE = P38/49T_1_10 OR P38/49T_2_10 OR P38/49T_3_10
b remote control order to inhibit protection 50/51 unit 1
VL1=SR(TC63,TC64) // TC63 set inhibition, TC64 reset inhibition
P50/51_1_113 = VL1 // VL1 is stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage.
SEPED303001EN 311
Control and monitoring Customized functions using
functions Logipam
Only the Sepam series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080
option can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by Logipam.
Operating principle
DE51891
4
Logipam programming software
The Logipam SFT2885 programming software can be used to:
PE50257
Offering more possibilities than the logic-equation editor, Logipam can be used to
create the following functions:
SFT2885: Logipam programming software. b specific automatic transfer functions
b motor starting sequences.
It is not possible to combine the functions programmed by Logipam with functions
adapted by the logic-equation editor in a given Sepam.
312 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions
Presentation
The reliability of a device is the property that allows its users to have well-placed
confidence in the service it delivers.
For a Sepam protection relay, operational reliability consists of ensuring the safety
and availability of the installation. This means avoiding the following 2 situations:
b Nuisance tripping of the protection
Continuity of the electrical power supply is as vital for a manufacturer as it is for an
electricity distribution company. Nuisance tripping caused by the protection can
result in considerable financial losses. This situation affects the availability of the
installation.
b Failure of the protection to trip
The consequences of a fault that is not eliminated can be catastrophic. For safety of
operation, the protection relay must detect faults in the power supply as quickly as
possible, using discrimination. This situation affects the safety of the installation.
The possibility of a Sepam major failure must be taken into account when selecting
the trip command type to maximize availability or safety of the installation (see
"Selecting the trip command" page 316).
In addition to the self-tests, the user can activate monitoring functions to improve the
installation monitoring:
b VT supervision (ANSI code 60FL)
b CT supervision (ANSI code 60)
b Trip circuit and closing circuit supervision (ANSI code 74)
b Auxiliary power supply supervision
These functions send an alarm message to the Sepam display unit and a data item
is automatically available to the communication to alert the user.
SEPED303001EN 313
Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions
Self-tests
The self-tests are run when Sepam is initialized and/or during its operation.
4 CCA630, CCA634,
CCA671, CCT640
MES120
On initialization and during operation
314 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions
Fail-safe position
When Sepam is in working order, it runs self-tests continuously. Detection of a major
failure places Sepam in the fail-safe position.
Relay output
Watchdog
5 to 7 seconds
Transient internal failure.
Relay output Each time a transient internal failure appears, Sepam increments an internal counter.
The fifth time the failure occurs, Sepam is placed in the fail-safe position. De-
energizing Sepam reinitializes the failure counter. This mechanism can be used to
Watchdog avoid keeping a Sepam running that is subject to repeated transient failures.
Counter 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5
Sepam
de-energized
Repeated transient internal failures.
SEPED303001EN 315
Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions
Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open
8 5 1 H 4 H
Inhibit closing O1 I101 I102
O2 7 4 2 5
11
Closing O3 10
316 SEPED303001EN
Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions
Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open
8 5 1 H 4 H
Inhibit closing O1 I101 I102
O2 7 4 2 5
11
Closing O3 10
=0
Undervoltage Setting the Sepam output parameters:
N/O trip O1: N/C
closing
coil
coil O2: N/C
O3: N/O 4
Example of use with undervoltage trip coil without fail-safe
condition (diagram 3)
DE80256
Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open
8 5 1 H 4 H
Inhibit closing O1 I101 I102
O2 7 4 2 5
11
Closing O3 10
=0
Setting the Sepam output paramete
Undervoltage O1: N/O
N/O
trip O2: N/C
closing coil
coil O3: N/O
SEPED303001EN 317
Control and monitoring Self-tests and fail-safe position
functions
5 1 H 4 H
O1 4 2 I101 5 I102
Closing Trip
Contactor
18 H 17 H
13 13
(1) (1)
I107 I106
Shunt
trip coil
318 SEPED303001EN
Notes
SEPED303001EN 319
Notes
320 SEPED303001EN
ART.52383 © 2016 Schneider Electric - All rights reserved